Subido por g_anx2000

Erbe ICC 300 - Service manual

Anuncio
ICC 200
ICC 300 H-E
ICC 350
09.2004
Service manual
ERBE
ICC 200, ICC 300 H-E, ICC 350
SERVICE
MANUAL
10128-002, 10128-009, 10128-010, 10128-015, 10128-016
10128-023, 10128-025, 10128-027, 10128-028, 10128-036
10128-051, 10128-054, 10128-055, 10128-056, 10128-058
10128-061, 10128-064, 10128-065, 10128-066, 10128-070
10128-071, 10128-072, 10128-073, 10128-074, 10128-075
10128-076, 10128-077, 10128-078, 10128-080, 10128-081
10128-082, 10128-083, 10128-200, 10128-202, 10128-204
10128-205, 10128-206, 10128-213, 10128-214, 10128-300
10128-301, 10128-303, 10128-304, 10128-305, 10128-306
10128-307,10128-310, 10128-403
09.2004
This service manual was created by
Michael Grosse
Dipl.-Phys. (Physicist)
Tel
Fax
E-Mail
(+49) 70 71 / 755–254
(+49) 70 71 / 755–5254
[email protected]
Net
http://www.erbe-med.de
Please contact me directly with your
suggestions, criticism or information
regarding this manual. Your feedback
helps me design this document
according to your requirements and to
constantly improve it.
All rights to this service manual, particularly the right to reproduction, distribution and translation,
are reserved. No part of this service manual may be reproduced in any form (including photocopying,
microfilm or other means), or processed, reproduced or distributed by means of electronic systems
without prior written permission from ERBE Elektromedizin GmbH.
The information contained in this service manual may be revised or extended without prior notice
and represents no obligation on the part of ERBE Elektromedizin GmbH.
Copyright © ERBE Elektromedizin GmbH, Tübingen 2004
Printed by: ERBE Elektromedizin GmbH, Tübingen
Printed in Germany
Art. No.: 80116-201
Contents
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Chapter
Title
Page
0
Table of contents ................................................................................... 5
1
Test programs and adjustments .......................................................... 7
Calling up Test program mode ....................................................................... 10
Basic settings of the SETUP parameters ........................................................ 11
Front panel of the ICC 200 (INT) after starting up the unit ......................... 12
Front panel of the ICC 200 (UL) after starting up the unit .......................... 13
Front panel of the ICC 300 after starting up the unit ................................... 15
Front panel of the ICC 350 after starting up the unit ................................... 16
Test programs 1–8 ........................................................................................... 17
Test program 9 (Display programs 1–12) ..................................................... 28
Test programs 10–15 ....................................................................................... 39
Test program 16 (Adjustments, measuring equipment, jumper) ................. 45
Adjustment of ZMK Neurotest and TUR Neurotest ................................... 105
Adjustment of remote control for Neurotest ............................................... 111
Adjustment of activation and instrument detection .................................... 115
Test program 17, 23 ....................................................................................... 123
2
ERROR list ......................................................................................... 127
3
Circuit description ............................................................................. 137
4
Block diagrams .................................................................................. 169
5
Circuit diagrams ................................................................................. 175
A
Appendix A (Part numbers, PCB arrangement) .............................. 241
B
Appendix B (Abbreviations, notes, addresses) .............................. 263
5 / 266
6 / 266
Chapter 1
Test programs
and
adjustments
Test programs
ERBOTOM ICC 350, 300, 200
Version 4.0 / 3.0 / 2.0
No. Test program function
V 4.0 / 3.0 / V 2.0
1 Basic front panel setting (only ICC 300 and 200)
x
2 Calls up the Error list
x
3 Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
x
4 Test of all front panel visual signals
x
5 Test of all acoustic signals
x
6 Test of all relays
x
7 NESSY: Version number setting
x
8 Display of software version no. and option no.
x
9 Activation of display programs
x
10 Time limit setup
11
Measurement and display of extra-low voltages +15 volts, –15 volts,
+24 volts and the temperature
12 Setting the FORCED voltage (2.0: 3 x forced; 4.0: 4 x forced)
x
x
x
13 not assigned
14 not assigned
15 not assigned
16 Test and setting help for all unit calibration functions
x
17 Brightness setting for the seven-segment displays
x
18 not assigned
19 not assigned
20 not assigned
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
21 not assigned
22 not assigned
23 AUTO START start delay setup
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
x
9 / 266
Calling up the
TEST PROGRAM mode
, ,
,
,,,
,
, ,
1
,,
,
,, ,
,
,, ,
2
3 4
5
7
8
9
11 12
14 15 16
Note regarding the drawing
The front panel shown of the ICC 350 applies to the ICC 200 and ICC 300 in such a way that only the
AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG control panels apply to the ICC 300, and the AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG
and AUTO BIPOLAR control panels apply to the ICC 300.
Calling up
Press key 3 (Roll) when switching on the power and hold it down.
Setting the test program number
Using keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), set the required program number.
Starting and finishing test programs
By pressing key 3 (Roll), start or finish a test program.
Exiting the test program mode
Exit the TEST PROGRAM MODE by switching off the power or setting TEST PROGRAM no. 0 using key 9
(Down).
10 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Basic settings of the SETUP
parameters
ERBOTOM ICC 350, 300 and 200
AUTO START delay
ICC 350, ICC 300
AUTO START delay
ICC 200
Autostart stage
Basic settings
Remarks
0
0s
adjustable using
Test program 23
1
0.5 s
2
1s
no stepping
0.5 s
output
max. time limit
Auto Cut
90 s
Auto Coag 1
90 s
Auto Coag 2
90 s
Auto Bipolar
90 s
NE 1
| || *)
Time limit setting
ICC 350
NESSY version no.
FORCED voltage version
Brightness of the
seven-segment display
*)
Test program 10
adjustable using
Test program 7
1
adjustable using
Test program 12
10
adjustable using
Test program 17
|| means a split NE electrode,
| means a non-split NE electrode,
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
| || means both split and non-split NE electrode are possible.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
11 / 266
Front panel of the ICC 200 (INT)
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
B asic setting IC C 200 w ithout
EN D O C U T option
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (with ARGON option)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (with ARGON option)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
END O C UT
ON
Basic setting ICC 200 with
ENDO CUT option
12
/ 266
Pulse le ngth
tON = 50 ms
Pause le ngth
tOFF = 750 ms
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Front panel of the ICC 200 (UL)
After starting up the unit
Factory programming
Basic programming
ICC 200 without ENDO CUT option
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO C UT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
13 / 266
NOTE
If the settings are reset, the factory programming of the ICC 200 E and ICC 200 E/A units is lost.
It can be restored using the following table.
Basic programming
ICC 200 E and ICC 200 E/A
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
200 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
25 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
SOFT
65 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
BIPOLAR
20 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (for IC C 200 E/A only)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
END O C UT
ON
14
/ 266
Pulse le ngth
tON = 50 ms
Pause le ngth
tOFF = 750 ms
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Front panel of the ICC 300
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
Basic setting ICC 300
Effect 3
150 watts max.
AUTO COAG
SOFT
60 watts max.
AUTO BIPOLAR
AUTO START = off
60 watts max.
Footswitch setting
yellow = AUTO CUT
blue = AUTO COAG
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO CUT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
15 / 266
Front panel of the ICC 350
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
Basic setting ICC 350
AUTO CUT
Effect 3
150 watts max.
HIGH CUT
switched off
–
AUTO COAG 1
SOFT
60 watts max.
AUTO COAG 2
FORCED
60 watts max.
AUTO BIPOLAR
AUTO START = off
AUTO STOP = off
40 watts max.
Footswitch setting
yellow = AUTO CUT
blue = AUTO COAG 2
16 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 1
ICC 200, 300 only
General description
Using this test program, any front panel setting can be made. This setting is known as the basic setting.
After termination, the basic setting is stored internally. Only completely saved channels are stored. The
basic setting display flashes. Acknowledge by pressing any key.
Termination
Using “Power off”.
Switch off a channel
Using the “Down” key (8), set the lowest intensity. Once the lowest display is set, the seven-segment
display changes to “---”. This means that the channel has been switched off.
Basic setting and brief power failure
For a brief power failure of 15 seconds max., the front panel setting last set is displayed.
Activation of a channel is blocked if a channel has not been completely set or the basic setting was not
acknowledged.
The basic setting set at the factory corresponds to the FIXE basic setting.
FIXE basic setting
A FIXE basic setting is stored in the program. This basic setting is accepted and displayed if:
the stored front panel setting is invalid, e.g. through failure of the circuit memory or through battery
memory lost,
•
in Test program 1, the “All off” setting has been accepted.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
17 / 266
Test program no. 2
Call up and display of the error memory
General description
The ICC units are equipped with a system for error detection, error indication and error memory. Every error
receives an error number (ERROR no.). The unit stores the last 10 ERROR numbers. Test program 2 displays
the stored ERROR numbers. The most recent error occurring chronologically is in memory location 1.
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Err.
1 ... 10
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
xxx
xxx: Display of the error number
By pressing keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can call up the memory locations one after another. By pressing
key 7, you delete the error numbers at all memory locations.
Example
After starting the test program with key 3, for example, Error no. 2 appears at memory location 1 with the
following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Err.
1
18 / 266
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
2
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 3
Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
General description
Test of all D-flipflop (D-FF) circuit memories. After starting the test with key 3, you will see the following display:
Display
(ICC 350, ICC 300)
AUTO CUT
buS
*)
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
0
AUTO BIPOLAR
d0 ... d7 alternating
Display
(ICC 200)
buS
d0 ... d7 alternating
buS*) (D-FF-Test Nr. 0) tests the external control bus for signal lines d0–d7. The signal lines d0–d7 are
switched on and off one after another. The switching statuses can be displayed on the bar graph (adapter
board 30183-102).
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can call up D-FF tests 1-11. You will see the following display:
Display
(ICC 350, ICC 300)
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
dFF
1 ... 11
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
d0 ... d7 alternating
Display
(ICC 200)
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
dFF 1 ... 9
d0 ... d7 alternating
The D-FF signal lines d0-d7 are switched on and off one after another. The signals can be measured at the
D-FF outputs. There is an error if
•
there is more than one output status at the same time,
•
there is constantly an output signal in spite of switching over,
•
there is no output signal in spite of D-FF activation.
*)
1
buS is the seven-segment display for the word „BUS“.
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
19 / 266
Test program no. 3
Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
Overview of the D-flipflop tests
Test no. D-FF description
20 / 266
Position
Remarks
0 external control bus
Motherboard
1 D-FF IC 2
Motherboard
2 D-FF IC 3
Motherboard
3 D-FF IC 9
Extra-low voltage and tone
4 D-FF IC 19
Control board
5 D-FF IC 20
Control board
6 D-FF IC 6
ST power stage
7 D-FF IC 10
Senso-board
8 D-FF IC 8
Relay board
not ICC 200
9
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
10
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
11
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 4
Check of the optical signals on the front
panel
General description
Using this program, you can test the optical displays on the front panel. After starting the test program, you
will see the following display:
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
All optical signals on the front panel are switched on. The 7-segment displays show “8.” for all numbers.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
21 / 266
Test program no. 5
Sound control for all available sounds
General description
Using this program, you can test and set all available sounds. After starting the program, you will see the
following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
ton
0 ... 4
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can set a test number from 0 to 4. The following correspondence
applies between the test numbers and the sounds:
Test no. Tones switched on
0
22 / 266
Tone variants
Remarks
Tone generation
switched off
1 Basic tone 1
Volume adjustable
2 Basic tone 2
Volume adjustable
3 Basic tone 3
Volume adjustable
4 Basic tone 4
Volume adjustable
Basic tone 1 to 3
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 2
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 3
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 2 and 3
Volume adjustable
Basic tone 1 to 3
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 2
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 3
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 2 and 3
Alarm volume
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 5
Sound control for all available sounds
Frequency adjustment for warning tones
The warning tone frequency setting can be adjusted independently of other assemblies on the low-voltage
power supply (jumper J2) with Test program no. 5.
Activate Test program no. 5. MP 4 is GND for frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 1«: Set frequency at MP 1 with TP 2 to 493 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 2«: Set frequency at MP 2 with TP 3 to 414 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 3«: Set frequency at MP 3 with TP 4 to 329 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
To check settings the various tones and mixed tones are generated one after the other by calling
»Tone 4«. Here, take especial care that the operating and warning tones have different volumes.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
23 / 266
Test program no. 6
Relay test
General description
Using this program, all relays can be actuated. The NESSY measurement monitor is switched off. After
ending the test program, relay no. 1 is switched on for the power starting current limitation.
Test program no. 6 is also intended for safety testing of the unit. With this test, there may be a brief
failure of the power supply due to the external intervention. If the test program is activated, the test
program is automatically called up again after a brief power failure of up to approx. 15 seconds. However,
if the power failure is longer than 15 seconds, this will not occur.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
rEL
0 ... 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Designation of the PCBs with their assigned relays
PCB
Slot
Relay function
Remarks
Motherboard ICC 350
–
see lines 3 and 4
Motherboard ICC 200
–
see lines 3 and 4
Motherboard
–
Rel. 1: Power starting current limitation
Motherboard
–
Rel. 2: Capacitance ground
Power module
J5
Rel. 1: Switchover ST generator: HF
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 1: Output HF: UE1 to NE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 2: Output HF: Rel. 3 to AE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 3: Output HF: UE1 to AE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 19: Connection to power supply
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 1: Output NE - NESSY
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 2: Output AE
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 3: Output NE
Relay board
J8
Rel. 1: Output AE 1
only ICC 300 / 350
Relay board
J8
Rel. 2: Output AE 2
only ICC 300 / 350
ICC 200: Mono output
board
J8
Rel. 1: Output AE 1
only ICC 200
24 / 266
1
only for ICC 350
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 6
Relay test
Overview of the relay test options
Test no. 0
Switch off all relays
Test object
Relay status
Rel. 1, motherboard
switched off
all other relays
switched off
Remarks
Power starting
current limitation
Test no. 1
Switch on all relays
Test object
Relay status
Rel. 1, motherboard
switched on
Rel. 2, motherboard
depending on
dongle installed
capacitance
grounded
(only ICC 350)
all other relays
switched on
Remarks
Power starting
current limitation
switched on
or off
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
All relays on PCBs additionally required for the ERBOTOM ICC 350 MIC are switched on.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
25 / 266
Test program no. 7
Setting the NESSY version
General description
Using this program, you can set four NESSY versions. After starting the test program, you will see the
following displays when you activate key 3:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
NE.1
|| or |
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
In the AUTO COAG field:
||
means a split neutral electrode,
|
means of non-split neutral electrode.
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can set four different NESSY versions:
No.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Remarks
1
NE.1
|| or |
for split and non-split electrodes
2
NE.2
|
only for non-split electrodes
3
NE.3
||
only for split electrodes; acoustic (3 times) and
visual alarm
4
NE.4
||
only for split electrodes; acoustic (continuous
tone) and visual alarm
At the end of the test, the NESSY version number is stored. Version number 1 is the standard version set
when the unit is delivered. In case of memory failure, version no. 1 is automatically set. When switching on
the power, version no. 2, 3 or 4 is displayed briefly if this is set. The standard version no. 1 is not displayed.
26 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 8
Display of the software version and any
options
General description
Using this program, you can display the software version, while on the ICC 350 and ICC 300, you can also
see the display of an option identification number.
After starting the program, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Snr
x.xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
y
Explanation:
x.xx Software version no. (e.g. 2.0)
y
Option code no. (e.g. 8).
Code
no. means
0 Unit without option
1 ICC 350: Neurotest ZMK
2 ICC 350: Neurotest TUR
4
8 ICC 350: ENDO CUT function
16
32
64
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
128
256
The code number is based on a binary code:
Example
Code no. 2 means
ICC 350 Neurotest TUR
Code no. 9 means
ICC 350 Neurotest ZMK
+
Endocut
1
+
8
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
27 / 266
Test program no. 9
Activating display programs to display
measurement values
General description
This program activates displays in the standby mode or during activation. With key 3, Test program no. 9 is
started.
After starting, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
nr.
0
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Within Test program no. 9, 22 subprograms for displaying specific data can be called up, while subprograms
16 to 22 are intended only for use by the manufacturer.
These subprograms can now be set using keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down). Once the required display program has
been selected, it is reactivated using key 3. The selected display program remains activated until the power
is switched off.
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
nr.
0 ... 22
28 / 266
AUTO COAG 2
1
AUTO BIPOLAR
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display programs nos. 1–3
The selected display program now displays the required data during regular operation of the unit. To do
this, the appropriate operating modes must be set and the accessories activated.
The display program remains activated until the power is switched off. To return to normal operation, the
unit must be switched off for a short time and switched back on again.
Display program no. 1: not assigned
Display program no. 2: not assigned
Display program no. 3:
ST generator time control with activation of SPRAY or FORCED.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
ttt
P2
P3
tst
ttt
Difference between set frequency and actual frequency
P2
Set power [W]
P3
Set power [W]
tst
Abbreviation of the test title (Time-ST stage)
Display program no. 3:
ST generator time control with activation of FORCED.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Display on ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
ttt
tst
ttt
Difference between set frequency and actual frequency
tst
Abbreviation of the test title (Time-ST stage)
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
29 / 266
Display programs nos. 4–5
Display program no. 4:
ST generator measurement values with ST generator activation.
Output measurement values U st, Ist
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
iii
P3
UI
uuu
Measurement value of the output voltage sensor
iii
Measurement value of the output current sensor
P3
Set power [W]
UI
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage and current measurement)
Display program no. 4:
ST generator measurement values with ST generator activation.
FORCED activation
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
USt
uuu
Measurement value of the output voltage sensor
Display program no. 5:
Power supply unit measurement values for ST generator activation.
Measurement values Unt, Int
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
iii
P3
UI
uuu
Measurement value of the power supply unit voltage
iii
Measurement value of the power supply unit current
P3
Set power
UI
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage, current measurement)
30 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program nos. 5–7
Display program no. 5:
Power supply measurement values with ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement values Unt, Int
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
Unt
uuu
Measurement value of the power supply unit voltage
Display program no. 6:
ST generator measurement values for ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement value Ist
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
Ist
iii
Measurement value of the output current sensor
Display program no. 7:
Power supply unit measurement values for ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement value Int
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
Int
Measurement value of the power supply unit current
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
iii
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
31 / 266
Display program no. 8
Display program no. 8:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value U act
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
ppp
uuu
cos
PU
ppp
HF power output [W], present power output
uuu
HF output voltage [V], present output voltage
cos
PU
cos-j-value from the table (ICC 350 only)
Abbreviation of the test title (Power and voltage measurement)
Display program no. 8:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value Uact
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
ppp
P
ppp
P
32 / 266
HF power output [W]
Abbreviation of the test title (Power measurement)
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 9
Display program no. 9:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement values I real, cos j (Real part of the current and cos j between voltage and current)
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
iii
cos
ppp
IC
iii
Real part of the measurement value from the HF output current
cos
ppp
cos-j value from the table (ICC 350 only)
HF power output [W] for ICC 350
IC
Abbreviation of the test title (Current measurement and cos j measurement)
Display program no. 9:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value: Measurement value of the real part of the HF output current
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
I
Measurement value of the real part of the HF output current
I
Abbreviation of the test title (Current measurement)
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
iii
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
33 / 266
Display programs nos. 10–11
Display program no. 10:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value U act
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
U
uuu
HF output voltage [V]
U
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage measurement)
Display program no. 11:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value cos j
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
cos
Cos
cos
cos-j value from the table
Cos
Abbreviation of the test title (cos-j measurement)
34 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 12 (Start)
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance at AUTO START, in standby operation.
Only valid for AUTO START 0, 1, 2 and in standby operation.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
P2
P3
br
uuu
Measurement value of the contact monitor voltage measurement
P2
Set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
Set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
Contact monitor
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in active condition.
Only valid for AUTO START 0, 1, 2 and in active condition.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
rda
P2
P3
br
Calculated value of the contact resistance [ohms]
P2
Set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
Set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
Contact monitor
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
rda
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
35 / 266
Display program no. 12 (continued)
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in standby operation.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
br
uuu
Measurement value of the contact monitor voltage measurement
br
Contact monitor
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in active condition.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
rda
br
rda
Calculated value of the contact resistance [ohms]
br
Contact monitor
36 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 15
Display program no. 15:
NESSY transition resistance in stand-by-operation and on activation.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
rtr
P2
P3
br
rtr
calculated NESSY transition resistance [Ohm]
P2
set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
AUTO START monitor
Display program no. 15:
NESSY transition resistance in stand-by-operation and on activation.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
rtr
r
calculated NESSY transition resistance [Ohm]
r
AUTO START monitor
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
rtr
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
37 / 266
Display programs nos. 13–22
NOTE
Display programs nos. 13 and 14 are not assigned. The program nos. 17–22 are only intended for internal
use by the manufacturer.
38 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 10
Changing the maximum time limit
General description
Using this program, you can change the time limit for the ICC 200, 300 and 350. The setting range varies
from 3 to 960 seconds.
Using the appropriate “Up” or “Down” keys, the time limit restriction for every current quality can be set
individually.
For the ICC 350, various time limit settings can be stored in the individual program memories for each user.
This occurs after selecting the program number with program memory key 2 and then changing the respective
current qualities using the appropriate “Up” or “Down” key.
After termination of Test program 10 using key 3, the settings made are stored.
In case of memory failure, as well as in the delivery condition, the max. time limit for all programs and
current qualities (CUT, COAG 1, COAG 2, BIPOLAR) is set at 90 seconds.
After starting Test program 10 with key 3, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
t1
t2
t3
t4
• t1: Time limit restriction for AUTO CUT in seconds
• t2: Time limit restriction for AUTO COAG 1 in seconds
• t3: Time limit restriction for AUTO COAG 2 in seconds
• t4: Time limit restriction for AUTO BIPOPLAR in seconds.
Using the following keys, you can adjust the max. time limit (see page 1-4):
:
Keys 4 and 5
• AUTO COAG 1 :
Keys 8 and 9
• AUTO COAG 2 :
Keys 11 and 12
• AUTO BIPOLAR :
Keys 15 and 16
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
• AUTO CUT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
39 / 266
Test program no. 11
Measurement value output for the
measurement channels
Using this program, you can measure the internal supply voltages and the temperature of the unit. In addition,
you can display all analog direct measurement channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 as well as analog multiplex measurement
channels.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
Display ICC 350 / 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
U
0
XX.X
U–
1
XX.X
U
2
XX.X
tPt
ttt
xxx
Ch
4 … 22
yyy
• XX.X
Voltage value [V]
• ttt
Temperature [°C]
• xxx
ADC measurement value in the range 0 … 255
• yyy
ADC measurement value in the range 0 … 255
AUTO BIPOLAR
Using the keys “Up” (8) or “Down” (9), call up the subprograms U, U-, tPt and Ch 4 … 22.
U0
is the low voltage controlled to +15 volts ±10%
U–1
is the low voltage controlled to –15 volts ±10%
U2
is the low voltage controlled to 24 volts ±10%
tPt
is the temperature display of the output stage ±15%
Ch4 … 22 are the analog measurement channels according to the following table:
Display ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
U.15
XX.X
–15
XX.X
U.24
XX.X
tPt
ttt
C.aa
yyy
40 / 266
AUTO COAG 2
1
AUTO BIPOLAR
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 11
Measurement value output of the
measurement channels
• XX.X
Voltage rating [ V ]
• ttt
Temperature [°C ]
• C.aa
Channel number
• yyy
ADC measurement value in the range 0 ... 255
Using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9) keys, call up the subprograms U, U-, tPt und C. 4-22.
U0
is the supply voltage controlled to +15 volts
U–1
is the supply voltage controlled to –15 volts
U2
is the supply voltage controlled to +24 volts
tPt
is the temperature display of the output stage
C. 4 … 22 are the analog measurement channels according to the following table.
Voltage test U 0 or U.15
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to +15 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 14.6 equals 14.6 volts
Voltage test U–1 or –15
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to –15 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 14.6 equals –14.6 volts
Voltage test U 2 or U.24
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to +24 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 23.6 equals +23.6 volts
Measurement of the output stage temperature
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Display tPt 25 means that the temperature inside the unit is 25 °C.
Test of the analog measurement channels (Subtest 4 … 22)
Measurement and display of 19 analog measurement channels inside the unit.
(Intended for internal use by the manufacturer only).
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
41 / 266
42 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 12
Setting the FORCED voltage
General description
When this program is called up, the set FORCED version is displayed. Using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9)
keys, you can set one of three (V2.0) or four (V4.0) FORCED versions.
With FORCED coagulation, the ST pulse generator produces short pulses with a high no-load voltage. The
high no-load voltage has both advantages and disadvantages which are described in this section with the
features.
Using Test program 12, the no-load voltage can be changed relative to the set power limitation.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
For.
vs nr
AUTO COAG 2
For.
Voltage limitation for FORCED coagulation
vs nr:
FORCED version nos. 1…3 (V2.0) or 1…4 (V4.0)
AUTO BIPOLAR
Call up the version number using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9) keys.
Forced version vs nr 1
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 1,300 Vp.
Above 30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 1,300 Vp.
Characteristics of the version vs nr 1
•
Minimal image interference on monitors.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal.
•
Good coagulation via a terminal without heavy spark formation.
•
No heavy spark formation even at a high power setting.
•
To direct power into the tissue, the tissue must be contacted (No power transmission via spark).
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
FORCED version vs nr 2
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 1,300 Vp. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage continues to increase:
No-load voltage at 40 watts: approx. 1,500 Vp
No-load voltage at 50 watts: approx. 1,700 Vp
No-load voltage at 60 watts: approx. 1,900 Vp
No-load voltage from 80 to 120 watts: approx. 2,300 Vp.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
43 / 266
Test program no. 12
Setting the FORCED voltage
Characteristics of version vs nr 2
The characteristics are between those of the vs nr 1 and those of the vs nr 3.
FORCED voltage version vs nr 3
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 2,300 V p. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 2,300 Vp.
Characteristics of version vs nr 3
•
Image interferences on monitors possible.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal possible.
•
Heavy spark formation with coagulation via a terminal.
•
Heavy spark formation also at a 30 watts power setting.
To direct high-frequency power into the tissue, the tissue must not necessarily be contacted (current flow or
powered transmission [see vs nr 2] possible via arc).
FORCED voltage version vs nr 4
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 2,600 Vp. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 2,600 Vp.
Characteristics of version vs nr 4
•
Image interference on monitors possible.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal possible.
•
Heavy spark formation with coagulation via a terminal.
•
Heavy spark formation also at a 30 watts power setting.
To direct high-frequency power into the tissue, the tissue must not necessarily be contacted (current flow or
powered transmission [see vs nr 2] possible via arc).
Important notes
•
The vs no set only applies to FORCED AUTO COAG 1, FORCED AUTO COAG 2 and for programs
0 to 11.
•
For the MIC program, vs nr 1 is automatically set.
•
In case of memory failure, vs nr 1 is automatically set.
When switching on the power supply, vs nr 2, vs nr 3 or vs nr 4 (V4.0) is briefly displayed. The standard vs
nr 1 is not displayed.
44 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Recommended measuring equipment
Measuring equipment
To service equipment from the ICC series, various meters are necessary. The following list summarizes
recommended measuring equipment for a quick overview.
ATTENTION !
Individual parts and boards are at supply voltage potential. After removing the housing cover, there is risk of
electrical shock due to unintentional contact with the power plug connected.
The HF power meter, the oscilloscope and the frequency counter must be operated as floating.
The unit contains a lithium battery which must only be discarded in battery collection containers in completely
discharged condition (i.e. after use). Otherwise, care must be taken to prevent shorting in accordance with
the battery regulations.
EE order no.
(230 V; 50/60 Hz)
EE order no.
(120 V; 50/60 Hz)
Testbox 2
20183-040
20183-041
70 V testbox for spark monitor ICC
20100-019
20100-028
Measuring equipment
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
HF power meter
—
Isolating transformer for APM 600
20100-013
Adapter cable for NESSY monitor
20100-003
Bipolar adapter cable
20100-004
Measurement cable for LF patient leakage current
20100-009 (standard)
Measurement cable for LF patient leakage current
20100-012 (international)
2-channel oscilloscope (> 40 MHz)
—
Frequency counter
—
Multimeter with µA range
—
Bipolar testbox automatic starter ICC
20100-017
Extension board
30183-106
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
45 / 266
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
General information
On the display board, there are slots for jumper which, by plugging in so-called “jumpers”, can activate
special software by which our HF surgical units from the ICC series can be adapted to prescribed special
conditions (such as are necessary in various countries) or by means of which specific tests can be performed
by the testing department and service.
WARNING
These jumpers are already positioned during production and must never be changed randomly. For a software
update, make certain that the jumpers are correctly plugged in. Back-up plugs are in the bag with the spare
fuses.
Where are the slots for the jumpers?
If you look at the display board inside the open unit from the perspective of the rear panel, the following
stylized image can be seen:
J3–J6
6
3
Connector
to the CPU
LED display
LED display
LED display
LED display
J7–J10
7
10
J7–J10
7
10
Only at right on
ICC 300
Two blocks are available to receive jumpers: At the top right is a block with the slots J3–J6, at the bottom
left (ICC 300: bottom right) is the block with the slots J7–J10.
46 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Block 1
Jumper plugged in
Jumper not plugged in
Output circuitry with
capacitance ground.
Output circuitry is "floating
output".
Maximum temperature of
generator is displayed
(ERROR 11).
The unit is delivered with this
setting.
J5 J5 functions together with J6.
(see following explanation)
(see following explanation)
J6 J6 functions together with J5.
(see following explanation)
(see following explanation)
Pos. Function
Only ICC 350:
Switchover of neutral
J3
electrode to "capacitance
grounded" or "floating output".
J4
Only for test purposes.
Temperature display.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The J5 and J6 slots are read by the CPU as a binary number. In this way four different functioning methods,
independent from one another, are programmable by plugging in these jumpers:
J5
J6
Description of the set function
free
free
None of the following 3 programs is selected.
plugged
free
Contact monitor is blocked and AUTO START display is "off".
free
plugged
During activation, another activation signal from some other source has switched off
the unit activation (Spanish regulation).
F leakage current > 150 mA, but < 300 mA:
Triple visual and acoustic alarm is triggered.
plugged plugged
HF leakage current > 300 mA:
The HF generator is switched off. Visual and acoustic alarm is triggered.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
47 / 266
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Block 2 (as of Version 1.06)
Pos. Function
Jumper plugged in
Jumper not plugged in
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
J7 (not in use)
Deactivation of ERROR 30
Low-resistance load operation possible for BIPOLAR COAG
(as of V 2.00):
< 5 ohms triggers ERROR 30
- after 4 s red LED (output
to protect accessories and
error)
J8 generator.
- Output current max. 1.5 A
ERROR 30 can be
- no ERROR indication
deactivated here when
(This specification especially
activating AUTO BIPOLAR.
applies to the USA.)
ERROR 30 warning appears
due to delivery status
(not USA, ERROR 30
deactivated here).
Regardless of the selection, special settings are necessary for specific countries. These can be found in the
following matrix. Explanation:
1
Jumper must be plugged in,
o
Jumper must not be plugged in,
x
(according to the description for Block 1).
48 / 266
Country
J5
J6
J7
J8
Germany
o
o
no function
per above table
European countries
(excepted:
see below)
o
o
no function
per above table
Great Britain
1
o
no function
per above table
Spain
o
1
no function
per above table
Japan
1
1
no function
per above table
USA
x
x
no function
1
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Note regarding ERROR 30
With bipolar coagulation, it may happen that, over a longer period of time, a short circuit occurs on one of
the bipolar forceps. Particularly for thin forceps, there is a danger with a short circuit that the forceps begin
to glow due to the high current and the HF generator is damaged due to a mismatch.
Since tissue resistance quickly reaches values above 50 ohms during a coagulation process with conventional
bipolar instruments, normally after starting the coagulation by desiccating the tissue, it is assumed that,
with a continuously low resistance of less than 50 ohms, an error status results which is indicated by
ERROR 30.
In addition, there are large-area coagulation forceps for which a resistance less than 50 ohms is set, insofar
as the legs are only open to a small degree. If the operating surgeon activates such an instrument with a
small leg opening, ERROR 30 is indicated after approx. 5 seconds and activation is switched off. This error
message is felt to be a nuisance by some operating surgeons. In these particular cases, the ERROR 30 error
message can be switched off on units above Version 2.00 by means of the jumper in position J8. In this case,
at a resistance less than 50 ohms, the output current of the ICC is limited to 1.5 A.
WARNING
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
For a power setting greater than 20 W, there is a danger of destroying the HF generator after approx. 1
minute during short-circuit operation. There is no warning if the ERROR 30 error message is switched off.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
49 / 266
Test program no. 16
General description
General description
All adjustment work is performed solely with the help of this test program. Here the sequence from
Adjustment 1 to Adjustment 13 must be followed.
Ending the test is only possible at the setting Adjustment 0 (as of 0 in the display).
If Test program 16 is activated, the test program is automatically called up again if there is a brief power
failure lasting up to approx. 15 seconds. If the power failure lasts longer than 15 seconds, the test program
is no longer automatically called up.
This text describes only the function of the program. The unit is adjusted according to the adjustment
instructions. These adjustment instructions are a component of the service documents.
After starting the test program with key 3, you will see the following display:
Display ICC 350 / 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
xx (0 … 13)
xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Adjustment test number (beginning with 0)
Display ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
Ab
xx
xx
Adjustment test number (beginning with 0)
Adjustment 0 permits entry and exit from Test program 16.
50 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
List of individual adjustments
Test program 16:
Adjustment
List of individual adjustments
Function of the adjustment
1
Phase relationship of the power supply unit
2
Current/voltage setting of the power supply unit
3
Setting of the actuation pulse length for the HF generator
4
Phase relationship of the HF generator
5
Current/voltage setting of the HF generator
6
Current/voltage setting of the amplified measurement values of the HF generator
7
Phase angle setting (cos Phi)
8
Adjustment of the function monitor sensor
9
NESSY adjustment: Contact resistance
10
HF leakage current monitor
11
Starting threshold of the contact monitor
12
Length of actuation pulse and frequency setting of the ST generator
13
LF leakage current measurement and setting help for CF
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Using the “Up” (8) and “Down” (9) keys, call up an adjustment test number. Start the adjustment test with
key 3.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
51 / 266
52 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 1
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
53 / 266
Adjustment 1
Power supply unit phase relationship
Procedure
•
Unplug power cable from the ERBOTOM ICC.
•
Pull off the black lines on the bridge-connected rectifier BR 1 on the motherboard and connect an
adjustable isolating transformer to BR 1 in its place, the output voltage of which is adjusted to 0 V.
With well prebalanced boards, a transformer with a fixed voltage of approx. 155 V AC can also be
used.
ATTENTION !
For units which are set to 120 V, you must absolutely make certain that the Erbotom ICC is operated via an
isolated transformer. In addition, the connection between J15 and J20 on the motherboard must be removed
from J15.
•
Connect 200 ohms load resistance (e.g. APM 600) to MP1 = GND and MP2 on the power module
(slot J5).
•
Connect the oscilloscope to MP1 = GND and MP2 = probe on QC power stage end stage (slot J4).
•
Plug the power cable for the Erbotom ICC back in and activate Test program 16, Adjustment 1.
•
Activate using the yellow pedal on the footswitch (AUTO CUT).
•
Slowly increase the output voltage on the isolating transformer. With a correct setting, the voltage
characteristic corresponds to the graph illustrated below, whereby the small dip (approx. 20 V) next
to the square-wave edges represent a good criterion of evaluation for this.
•
Set the phase angle using TP13 (control board, slot J3). For the final setting, the square-wave voltage
must be increased to approx. ±100 V. (Display in AUTO CUT approx. 205).
•
After the setting is complete, disconnect the ERBOTOM ICC from the power, remove the cable from
the isolating transformer to BR1 and connect the two black lines again to the bridge-connected
rectifier.
Fig.: Voltage characteristic of supply unit power
T
1>
1) Ch 1:
54 / 266
50 Volt 500 ns
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 1
Power supply unit phase relationship
ICC 350
ICC 300
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Ab
nPh
before activation
U NTG
nPh
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
Ab
nPh
before activation
U NTG
nPh
after activation
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
• nPh
Adjustment of the phase relationship for the power supply unit generator
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
55 / 266
56 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 2
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
57 / 266
Adjustment 2
Power supply unit output parameters
Procedure
•
Connect 500 ohms load resistance (APM 600) to MP1 = GND and MP2 = +U on “Power Module”
board (slot J5).
•
Plug in the power cable on the ICC.
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 2.
•
Activate ERBOTOM ICC using the yellow footswitch pedal (AUTO CUT).
•
Set TP2 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that 100 W (tolerance +0% / –7%) can be
measured at the HF power meter and a power supply current of 447 mA (tolerance 444...455 mA) is
displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 display. In the AUTO CUT display, a power supply voltage of 223
V (tolerance 223…227 V) is displayed.
•
Disconnect the ICC from the power and remove the connecting cable from MP1 and MP2.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
2
U NTG
I NTG
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
I NTG V1
nUI
before activation
nUI
during activation
• U NTG
Power supply voltage [V];
Set value = 223 V
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA];
Set value = 447 mA
• I NTG V1 Amplified power supply current [mA]
• nUI
Adjustment of the current voltage setting of the power supply generator
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
U NTG
AUTO COAG
nUI
before activation
I NTG
after activation
• U NTG
Power supply voltage [V];
Set value = 223 V
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA];
Set value = 447 mA
58 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 2
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Power supply unit output parameters
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
59 / 266
60 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 3
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
61 / 266
Adjustment 3
Actuation pulse length HF generator
Procedure
•
Measure the actuation pulse TS1 on the control board (slot J3) with an oscilloscope at measuring
point MP6 = GND and MP2 = probe tip.
•
Switch on the ICC and call up Test program 16, Adjustment 3.
•
Using TP14 on the control board (slot J3), set a pulse length of 350 ns.
ATTENTION: Pulse is inverted.
•
Disconnect the ICC from the power.
•
Remove the probe from MP6 and MP2.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
3
• thF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
thF
Pulse length of the HF generator [ms];
auto. activated
Set value = 350 ns
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
thF
• thF
62 / 266
Pulse length of the HF generator [ms];
auto. activated
Set value = 350 ns
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 3
Actuation pulse length HF generator
5 V/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
100 ns/Div
Fig.: Transistor switching pulse
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
63 / 266
64 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 4
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
65 / 266
Adjustment 4
Phase relationship HF generator
Procedure
•
Switch the ICC back on and call up Test program 16, Adjustment 4.
•
With probe 100 : 1, the no-load HF output voltage between the active and neutral electrode must be
measured; for 2 monopolar outputs: Output CUT / COAG 2.
•
Activate the ICC using the yellow footswitch pedal (AUTO CUT).
•
Observing the output voltage form, increase the power supply voltage in the CUT field (AUTO CUT
display corresponds to the set power supply voltage; AUTO COAG 1 display corresponds to the
actual power supply voltage). Using TP15 on the control board (slot J3), a symmetrical sine-wave
characteristic must be set.
•
At a maximum power supply voltage (= 250 V), make the final adjustment. At the same time, set a
good symmetrical sine-wave shape and a minimum power supply current (= display in AUTO BIPOLAR field), which means a minimal no-load power loss (see Fig.). CAUTION: The best possible
sine-wave characteristic has priority over the absolute current minimum.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
U SOLL = 30 V
4
U SOLL
U NTG
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
I NTG V1
• U SOLL
Set power supply voltage [V]
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
Ph
before activation
I NTG
during activation
• I NTG V1 Amplified power supply current [mA]
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA]
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
U SOLL (Start = 30 V)
nPh
before activation
U SOLL
U NTG
after activation
• U SOLL
Set power supply voltage [V]
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
66 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 4
Phase relationship HF generator
300 V/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
500 ns/Div
Fig.: HF no-load voltage
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
67 / 266
68 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 5
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
69 / 266
Adjustment 5
HF generator output parameters
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 5.
•
Connect the HF power meter, e.g. APM 600 (set to 500 ohms) via active cable to active and neutral
electrode output sockets on the ICC; for 2 monopolar outputs: CUT / COAG 2 output and NE socket.
•
Activate the unit with the yellow pedal of the footswitch (AUTO CUT).
•
Using TP3 on the control board (slot J3), the HF output voltage is set in such a way that a power of
100 watts is indicated on the HF power meter and a value of 223 volts HF effective voltage (tolerance
220…223 volts) in the display on the AUTO CUT field.
•
Under certain conditions, TP 4 (HF current limitation) must be turned back far enough before this
setting so that no current limitation is effective.
•
Using TP4 on the control board (slot J3), the HF current limitation is set in such a way that a value of
447 mA effective HF current (tolerance 439…447 mA) with constant power output appears in the
AUTO COAG 1 field.
•
Insofar as the measurement of the phase angle between HF voltage and HF current produces a value
greater than 98 (which is 100 · cos j) at this setting in the AUTO COAG 2 field, a value of 100 watts
HF power output is displayed (tolerance 97...100 watts) in the AUTO BIPOLAR field after correct
adjustment of voltage and current.
•
For the voltage characteristic at a 500 ohms load, see Fig.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
5
U HF
I HF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
cos Phi
UI
before activation
P
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
U HF
UI
before activation
I HF
after activation
• U HF
HF voltage [V];
• I HF
Real part of HF current [mA];
70 / 266
Set value = 223 V
Set value = 447 mA
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 5
HF generator output parameters
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
100 V/Div
Fig.: HF voltage at
R = 500 ohms
500 ns/Div
• cos Phi
Phase angle 0…100*)
•P
Emitted active power
Set value = 100
[W];
Set value = 100 watts at 500 R
cos-j display, when the “Up” (8) key is pressed.
P display, when the“Down” (9) key is pressed.
*)To avoid decimal places, the value of the table value of cos j is indicated times 100, such that 100 means cos j = 1.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
71 / 266
72 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 6
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
73 / 266
Adjustment 6
HF generator output parameters amplified
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 6.
•
With the same setup as for Adjustment 5, the unit is activated. At the same time, 5 watts (tolerance
4.5…5.5 watts) should be output at the HF power meter.
•
Using TP 5 on the control board (slot J 3), the amplified HF voltage measurement is set in such a way
that a value of 50 volts HF output voltage is displayed in the AUTO CUT field.
•
Using TP 6 on the control board, the amplified HF current measurement is set. The value 100 mA Hf
output current is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field when set correctly.
•
In the Auto Bipolar field, the emitted active power is displayed.
•
In the Auto Coag 2 field, the phase angle cos j is displayed.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
6
U HF
I HF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
cos Phi
UI
before activation
P
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
U HF
AUTO COAG
UI
before activation
I HF
after activation
• U HF
HF voltage amplified [V];
Set value = 50 V
• I HF
Real part of the amplified HF current [mA]; Set value = 100 mA
• cos Phi
Phase angle 0…100 from the table
Set value = 100
•P
Emitted active power
Set value = 5 watts at 500 R
[W];
ICC 200:
cos-j display appears when the “Up” (8) key is pressed.
P-display appears when the “Down” (9) key is pressed.
74 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 6
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
HF generator output parameters amplified
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
75 / 266
76 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 7
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
77 / 266
Adjustment 7
Phase angle (cos j)
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 7.
•
Using ERBE original cable, connect the APM 600 (set at 500 ohms) to the ICC; with 2 monopolar
connections: Connect active output socket: CUT / COAG 2 (ICC 300 / 350) and NE socket.
•
Connect a capacitor with 1 nF (e.g. ERBE component no. EE 51103-026) with short lines across the
active electrode and NE sockets on the HF power meter.
This produces a phase shift between voltage and current of 45° at a frequency of 340 kHz.
•
Activate the cut footswitch.
•
Using TP 7 on the control board (slot J3), the unit is set in such a way a value of 73 (display is
100 · cos j) is displayed in the AUTO CUT field and a value of 120 (analog / digital converter
measured value) is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Ab
7
PHI
before activation
COS
xxx
PHI
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
COS
• COS
AUTO COAG
PHI
before activation
xxx
after activation
cos-j values from table;
Set value = 73
0 means phase shifting = 90°
100 means phase shifting = 0°
• xxx
Analog cos-j measurement value;
• Veff
HF output voltage;
Range 0…255
200 mA output current limitation
78 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 7
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Phase angle (cos j)
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
79 / 266
80 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 8
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
81 / 266
Adjustment 8
Spark monitor
Procedure (also applies to the units without HIGH CUT or ENDO CUT)
•
On the ICC 300 and ICC 200 without ENDOCUT, TP8 should be set to the upper limit (to do this,
turn TP8 clockwise).
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 8.
•
A DC voltage of 70 volts is fed into the patient circuit between the center control for the active AE
socket (with 2 monopolar outputs: Output CUT / COAG 2) and the neutral electrode NE socket (AE =
+, NE = –). To do this, the ERBE TESTBOX 70 volts is recommended (ERBE Order no. 20100-019).
•
Adjust TP8 on the control board (slot J3) is set in such a way that a measurement value of 77 is
indicated for the A/D converter, and a value of 70 volts DC is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field.
On the ICC 200 ENDOCUT, this value appears in the AUTO CUT field, while the A/D converter
value is not shown.
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
yyy
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
FU
Standby
ICC 200 ENDO CUT
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
yyy
FU
Standby
• yyy
Fed-in DC voltage for the spark measurement value (70 V)
• xxx
Analog spark measurement value
The input for applying the test DC voltage is the CUT / COAG 2 socket.
82 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 8
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Spark monitor
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
83 / 266
84 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 9
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
85 / 266
Adjustment 9
NESSY resistance measurement
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 9.
•
Connect an NE cable to the NE input receptacle on the ICC system.
•
Connect the other end of the NE cable between 120 ohms of resistance.
•
Set TP9 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that a measurement value of 200 for the A/D
converter is displayed in the AUTO CUT field and a resistance of 120 ohms is displayed in the AUTO
COAG 1 field.
•
Now exchange the terminating resistor for a resistance value of 40 ohms. Now verify the measurement
at this resistance; a resistance of 40 ohms (tolerance 37...43 ohms) must be displayed in the AUTO
COAG 1 field.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
R üb
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
r
Standby
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
xxx
R üb
Standby
• R üb
Contact resistance at the neutral electrode [W]
• xxx
Analog measurement value of the contact resistance.
For resistance values outside the measurement accurary, the display --- appears.
86 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 9
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
NESSY resistance measurement
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
87 / 266
88 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 10
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
89 / 266
Adjustment 10
HF leakage current measurement
Procedure (This adjustment only applies to the ICC 350)
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 10.
•
Connect the HF power meter (set to 350 ohms load resistance) between the active electrode of the
CUT / COAG 2 (center) socket and the potential equalization.
•
Jumper J3 must be plugged into the display board for this adjustment (earthed reference).
•
Short together the NE-ERBE original adapter cable. Activate the ICC 350 using the blue footswitch
pedal (AUTO COAG 1).
•
Using the power setting in the AUTO COAG 1 field, set the leakage current flowing to ground to a
value of 150 mAeff (tolerance 131…169 mA) (use an HF effective current meter or set a power of 7.9
watts at a HF power meter with a load resistance of 350 ohms [tolerance 6.0…10 watts (from P = I² · R
with P = 7.9 watts and R = 350 ohms is a current I = 150 mA)]).
•
Set TP10 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that the HF leakage alarm is thus displayed
visually (the LED in the safety field flashes in the display indicates the value 50 in the Auto Cut
field).
•
Increase the leakage current by changing the power setting until an audible alarm is also emitted.
This should occur at 300…350 mA (accordingly 31.5…43 watts on a HF power meter at the above
setting).
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
ppp
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
HFL
• ppp
Set SOFT COAG power which can be changed during activation.
• xxx
Measurement value of the HF leakage current measurement.
Standby
Using the power setting in the AUTO COAG 1 field, set the HF leakage current flowing to ground at
Ieff = 150 mA. This is not assigned for the ICC 200 and 300 since no HF leakage current monitor is
available there.
90 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 10
HF leakage current measurement
ICC
AE
APM 600
NE
AE
Potential equalization
NE cable with pin
short-circuit
I
HF leakage
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
3 m cable
NE
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
91 / 266
92 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 11
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
93 / 266
Adjustment 11
Contact monitor
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 11.
•
At the BIPOLAR output of the ICC, the ERBE bipolar Testbox for the bipolar automatic starter (EE
20100-017 ) or appropriate fixed resistors (1.2 kOhm and 2.5 kOhm with a capacity of 15 watts as
well as 18 kOhm, 1 watt) is connected via the EE bipolar original cable.
•
With a resistance of 2.5 kOhm (socket 1–2), a value of 25 must be displayed in the AUTO CUT field.
(Display = resistance divided by 100). The setting of the switch-on threshold with PT11 on the PCB
control board (slot J3) proceeds in such a way that, at a load resistance of 2.5 kOhm, the display in
the AUTO COAG 2 field changes from “OFF” to “ON”.
•
Now the short-circuiting monitor is set by connecting a 6 ohm resistor (capacity = 0.5 watts) to the
BIPOLAR outlet. Then, the display »rLo« appears on the AUTO COAG 1 display. Using TP12 on the
PCB control board J3, the display is set to a measurement value of 100 in the AUTO CUT display.
•
Testing the shutdown response: To do this, exit Test program 16 briefly by selecting Test program 0.
The ICC operates in the normal mode. Switch on AUTO START 1. Set the bipolar power to 1 watt.
The BIPOLAR outlet is connected to sockets 1 and 3 on the ERBE Testbox and thereby charged with
1.2 kOhm. The BIPOLAR generator must automatically be activated after the delay time. Now press
pushbutton 1 on the Testbox. This raises the capacity resistance to 18 kOhm. The BIPOLAR generator
must now shut down.
•
This test must be repeated at the power settings 20 watts, 40 watts, 50 watts (or without AAMI
standard up to 120 watts).
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
OFF
br
open output
rda
ON
br
loaded output
iii
rLo
br
loaded output
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
OFF
open output
rda
ON
loaded output
94 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 11
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Contact monitor
• uuu Standby measurement value of the contact monitor at a preset bipolar power of 10 watts
• rda Calculated contact resistance at activation [W/100]
• iii
Amplified output current at contact resistance < 1 kW
• rLo Display if resistance measured at activation < 1 kW
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
95 / 266
96 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 12
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
97 / 266
Adjustment 12
Pulse/pause length ST output stage
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 12.
•
Measure actuation impulse TSI_STE at measuring point MP 3 on ST output stage (slot J6) with the
oscilloscope (measuring point MP1 = GND).
•
Using TP16, set this to a pulse length of 200 ns (±50 ns).
IMPORTANT! The pulse time is measured at average amplitude, i.e. at approx. 7.5 volts level.
ATTENTION! The pulse is inverted.
•
The repetition frequency at TP17 is set in such a way that the value 0 (tolerance 0...4) is displayed in
the AUTO CUT field.
•
Now exit the test program and return the ICC to normal operating condition.
•
To check the performance, connect the HF output to the HF power meter, setting 500 ohms.
•
Activate the ICC using the blue footswitch pedal at the SPRAY and FORCED normal settings. The
power output in watts should correspond to the display in the AUTO COAG 2 field.
•
Check whether the maximum emitted output power with SPRAY and FORCED is within the tolerance
limits (120 W ± 15 %). If necessary, conform the pulse length to the PCB control board using TP16.
TP17 must no longer be changed.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
ppp
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tSt
Standby
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
xxx
tSt
Standby
• ppp Set AUTO COAG 2 FORCED power
• xxx Difference = Set frequency minus actual frequency
98 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 12
Pulse/pause length ST output stage
5 V/Div
50 ns/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Fig. : Transistor switching pulse ST
output stage
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
99 / 266
100 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment 13
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
101 / 266
Adjustment 13
LF leakage current monitor (ICC 350 only)
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 13.
•
Set the jumper to the “capacitance grounded” operating mode (place jumper J3 on display board).
•
Perform adjustment using ERBE TESTBOX 2 or another 50 Hz sine-wave current source.
•
Between the neutral electrode output and the potential equalization, feed a 50 Hz sine-wave current
of 45 µA (see Figure).
•
Using TP1 on the motherboard, set the leakage current monitor in such a way that the display in the
AUTO CUT field changes just from 0 to 1 at 45 µAeff.
Reset jumper to previous condition.
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
x
I nF
•x
Standby
x = 0 for LF leakage current < 50 µA
x = 1 for LF leakage current > 50 µA.
For adjustment, the test current must be fed according to the instructions.
Adjustment 13 is not assigned on the ICC 300 and ICC 200.
Measurement setup
Battery-powered
measurement unit
only!
INF
ICC
AE
NE
+
ERBE
Testbox 2
18
N
LI
PE
19
102 / 266
1
Power
supply
110 V
115 V
230 V
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 13
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
LF leakage current monitor
TP1
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
103 / 266
104 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment of
ICC 350 ZMK Neurotest
Version V2.00
ICC 350 TUR Neurotest
Version V2.00
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
105 / 266
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Jumper JP4 on the front panel is used to activate the display of the feedback frequency of output current
measurement and display of the feedback frequency of the remote control are activated.
ATTENTION
On the ZMK version, there is a display only during activation and if the Neurotest circuit is closed. On the
TUR version there is a display as soon as the NT LED lights up on the remote control.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
SPH
Intensity no.
Frequency measurement Current measurement
SPH:
The Neurotest program is activated.
Intensity no.
Set intensity number is 1…5. It corresponds to the intensity number which has been set
on the remote control.
Frequency measurement Measurement of feedback frequency of the remote control.
Current measurement
Measurement of feedback frequency of the output current measurement.
Setting the feedback frequency of output current measurement
(trimming potentiometer TP 1: Setting the feedback frequency)
The Neurotest board is isolated and actuated via optocoupler. The feedback frequency of the output current
measurement also takes place via an optocoupler. The output current pulse is converted into a frequency.
This frequency can be measured at test point MP7. Test point MP6 is reference ground. Test points MP6 and
MP7 relate to the electronic circuitry of the ICC unit. Without activation, the feedback frequency is 0 Hz.
After the pulse time, the feedback frequency is only available at MP7 for a brief period.
Test setup
At the Neurotest output, connect up a test resistor of 1 kOhm, 0.5 W and 1%. On the TUR version, the
Neurotest output is between the neutral electrode and the CUT/COAG 2 output. The TUR version is activated
with the yellow pedal of the dual-pedal footswitch. On the ZMK version the Neurotest output is between the
neutral electrode and the Neurotest output. The ZMK version is activated with the ZMK fingerswitch.
The setting is performed at intensity 3. For this setting the set feedback frequency must be adjusted to 73. If
the electronic fuse trips, the display of feedback frequency is approx. 40.
106 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Current measurement
Set
Min.
Max.
SPH
1
52
42
75
SPH
2
91
81
100
SPH
3
(Set value 73)
73
63
83
SPH
4
64
54
74
SPH
5
59
49
69
ATTENTION!
Don't forget to remove the jumper!
Check the fusible link for correct rating
F1: Microfuse FF 1/16 /125 V (62 mA), Wickmann Type 19278K
High-voltage test
The high-voltage test is conducted according to the specifications in the test record.
Testing the activation signals
The TUR version is activated with the yellow pedal of the double-pedal footswitch. The ZMK version is
activated with the ZMK fingerswitch.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Performance test on the constant-current circuit
A test resistor of 1k, 0.5W and 1% and a rotary potentiometer of 50k 0.3W are connected in series at the
Neurotest output. Measure the square-wave voltage on the 1k test resistor. (1mA corresponds to 1V) The
tolerance range of output currents is +25% to –25%. Larger deviations generate an output error display.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
107 / 266
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Square-wave output peak current
Control range of constant-current source
SPH 1: 5 mA
0R…approx. 20 kOhm
SPH 2: 10 mA
0R…approx. 10 kOhm
SPH 3: 15 mA
0R…approx. 6 kOhm
SPH 4: 20 mA
0R…approx. 5 kOhm
SPH 5: 25 mA
0R…approx. 4 kOhm
Testing the constant-current source
Slowly set the rotary potentiometer higher from 0R. At a total resistance of approx. 6 kOhm, there is an
output error display. At approx. 6 kOhm, the output current is constant.
Performance test on output error monitoring.
•
At the Neurotest output connect a test resistor of 1 kOhm, 0.5 W and 1%.
•
Set SPH 1.
•
Activate the unit. When the circuit is interrupted there will be an output error message.
Performance test on the electronic fuse
The output current is monitored constantly. In the event of an excess dose, the electronic fuse trips and via
longitudinal transistor T3 switches off the constant-current source supply voltage. The electronic fuse is
monitored in the interval between the pulses. If the electronic fuse has tripped, this is indicated by the
message ERROR 90 or ERROR 84.
•
To trip the electronic fuse: Activate the Neurotest function and briefly connect test point MP9 to MP2.
The electronic fuse should respond. The microfuse must not trip.
General information about the self-check
Before activation, or when setting the intensity on the remote control, there is a check on the electronic fuse
in two steps.
1.
Briefly switch on transistor T1 and thus trip the electronic fuse. There is a message ERROR 90 or
ERROR 84 if the electronic fuse has tripped.
2.
Briefly switch on transistor T2 and thus reset the electronic fuse. There is a message if the electronic
fuse has not been reset.
108 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Activation test
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Activation of the HF LED on the remote control takes place at intensity setting 0 using the rotary switch on
PC board EE 30121-442. At an intensity setting of 1 to 5 the NT LED is actuated by the CPU and the HF
LED must not light up. On the TUR version a check must be performed as to whether activation of the HF
is inhibited when intensity of 1 ... 5 is set. On the ZMK version, activation of the HF is possible even if
intensity 1 ... 5 has been set.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
109 / 266
110 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment of
remote control for
Neurotest
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
111 / 266
Adjustment of
remote control for Neurotest
Neurotest board
EE 30121-442
Setting the remote control for Neurotest board EE 30121-442
Jumper JP4 on the front panel is used to activate the display of the feedback frequency of output current
measurement and display of the feedback frequency of the remote control are activated.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
SPH
Intensity no.
Frequency measurement Current measurement
ATTENTION!
On the ZMK version, there is a display only during activation and if the Neurotest circuit is closed. On the
TUR version there is a display as soon as the NT LED lights up on the remote control.
SPH:
The Neurotest program is activated.
Intensity no.
Set intensity number is 1…5. Corresponds to the intensity number
which has been set on the remote control.
Frequency measurement Measurement of feedback frequency of the remote control.
Current measurement
Measurement of feedback frequency of the output current measurement.
Setting the feedback frequency for intensity setting
(trimming potentiometer TP 1: Setting feedback frequency)
The intensity setting is converted to a frequency. This frequency can be measured at Pin 1 AD654 on IC1.
Test point MP6 is reference ground. Frequency is measured using a frequency meter. The setting takes
place at intensity 5 - for this setting the set feedback frequency is adjusted to 38.0 Hz (–0.5 Hz, +0.0 Hz) on
the frequency meter.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Frequency measurement
Currency [Hz]
Set
Min.
Max.
Set
Min.
Max.
SPH
1
7
5
10
200
180
215
SPH
2
14
11
20
105
80
120
SPH
3
(Set value 73)
24
21
28
62
57
67
SPH
4
32
29
36
45
43
49
SPH
5
38
37
60
38
37
40
112 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of
remote control for Neurotest
Neurotest board
EE 30121-442
ATTENTION!
Don’t forget to remove the jumper.
Setting the feedback frequency for intensity adjustment can also be performed without the ICC unit by
supplying +15 V to the remote control and measuring the feedback frequency using the frequency meter.
High-voltage test
The high-voltage test is performed using the specifications in the test record.
Testing the LED display
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Actuation of the HF LED is conducted at intensity setting 0 using the rotary switch PC board on EE 30121442. At an intensity setting of 1 to 5, the NT LED is actuated by the CPU and the HF LED must not light up.
The NT LED only lights up when the feedback frequency is in the valid range. Check intensity setting 1…5.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
113 / 266
114 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment of
activation
and instrument detection
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
115 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200 (V4.0)
List of units involved
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN
V4.0 EE 10128-080
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
V4.0 EE 10128-081
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN F
V4.0 EE 10128-082
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Int.
V4.0 EE 10128-083
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Int UL
V4.0 EE 10128-215
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Japan, 100V
V4.0 EE 10128-310
Identification of the trimming potentiometers:
Trimming potentiometer TP 1: setting the instrument detection.
Trimming potentiometer TP 2: setting the activation detection.
Valid instrument number
Program no.
Instrument
Resistance
Instrument no.
12 MIC
TEM instrument EE 20191-275
10 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
1
13 MIEN
Probe EE 20191-356
30 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
2
13 MIEN
Probe EE 20191-357
30 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
2
The probes of no. 2 are only suitable for coagulation and CUT remains inhibited.
Display of instrument number
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Inr.
Nr.
p3
nd
Inr.
Instrument recognized
No.
Instrument number
p3
Power setting AUTO COAG 2
–nd
Compressed air valve for needle control is actuated (only MIC)
nd
Compressed air valve for needle control is not actuated (only MIC)
116 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Setting the instrument detection
•
The setting takes place in program 12 MIC.
•
Connect a resistor of 51 R, ± 1% and 0.2W to the test line.
ATTENTION!
The original ERBE TEM connecting cable EE 20192-086 has a cable impedance of 1 Ohm per cable, which
produces a series resistance of 2 Ohms for the instrument detection. In the line to and from the unit the
instrument test line must have a series resistance of < 0.5 Ohm. Since on the V4.00 version only the TEM
instrument no. 1 and MIEN probe no. 1 are connected up, it is sufficient to perform the balance only for
these instruments.
With jumper JP4 on the front panel the measurement display is activated.
Measurement display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
I measurement
I no.
I-measurement
Measurement of instrument detection 0…255
I-No.
Instrument number
Using trimming potentiometer TP 1, set I measurement to 52 (resistance of 51 R ± 1%; 0.2 W).
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Testing the instrument detection
1
Detection resistance
Instrument no.
0R
0
0…2
10 R
1
3…20
30 R
2
21…45
51 R
3
set value 52
62 R
4
70…91
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Valid range
117 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Setting of activation detection
Set the trimming potentiometer TP 2 to approximately the center position.
ATTENTION!
Never forget to remove jumper JP4.
Test instructions for program 12 MIC
•
•
Assignment of MIC output socket for the MIC program:
Pin 1:
NE 1
Pin 2:
NE 2 not assigned
Pin 3:
CUT cutting function
Pin 4:
Instrument detection between Pin 1 and Pin 4
Pin 5:
Activation detection between Pin 1 and Pin 5
Set and test instrument detection and activation detection:
Test instrument detection together with the TEM instrument EE 20191-275 and connecting cable EE
20192-086 in the MIC program.
•
Connect up the compressed air supply:
The MIC output socket is active in the MIC program. Connect up to the compressed air supply (max.
5 bar). Connect up 10 Ohm detection resistor corresponding to TEM instrument no. 1.
•
Test CUT function:
The CUT function is activated with the yellow footswitch.
MIC socket
AUTO CUT
APM
P [Watt]
NE1
CUT
Effect 3
40 W
500 Ohm
40 ± 15 %
ATTENTION!
The measuring system will be damaged beyond repair if the HF lines are connected up to the APM incorrectly.
118 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
The output error display is activated at 40 W and 500 Ohm. Activation of the BIPOLAR CUT function
is also possible without the neutral electrode.
•
Compressed air control
At instrument 1 the compressed air valve is opened during CUT activation. The compressed air valve
controls the needle of the TEM instrument. After activation the needle reset time elapses. After needle
reset time has elapsed the compressed air valve closes and the needle is reset. Needle reset time is
indicated in test program 23. Check the compressed air valve to make sure that it operates properly
and to ensure there are no leaks.
•
Check monopolar coagulation
Activation of the SOFT function and the FORCED function is performed using the blue footswitch.
MIC socket
NE1
ICC 350 NE Electrode
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
SOFT 120 Watt
75 Ohm
120 ± 15 %
FORCED 60 Watt
350 Ohm
60 ± 15 %
Test instructions for program 13 MIEN
•
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
Assignment of the MIC output socket for the MIEN program
Pin 1:
NE 1 bipolar
Pin 2:
CUT and COAG function bipolar. (MIEN protective circuit).
Pin 3:
not assigned
Pin 4:
Instrument detection between Pin 1 and Pin 4
Pin 5:
Activation detection between Pin 1 and Pin 5
Test instrument detection.
Test instrument detection together with the MIEN probe EE 20191-305/308 and handlepiece EE
20191-306 in the MIEN program.
•
Test bipolar CUT function
The CUT function is activated using the yellow footswitch.
ATTENTION!
The measuring system will be damaged beyond repair if the HF lines are connected up to the APM incorrectly.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
119 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
MIC socket
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
NE1 CUT
Effect 3
15 Watt
500 Ohm
15 ± 3 (W)
The output error display is activated at 40 W and 500 Ohms. Activation of the bipolar CUT function is also
possible without the neutral electrode.
•
Test bipolar SOFT coagulation
The SOFT function is activated with the blue footswitch.
•
MIC socket
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
NE1 CUT
SOFT 15 Watt
500 Ohm
No-load voltage 84 ± 5 Vp
7 ± 2 (W)
Test the protective circuit with test program 18
In the event of an error, the protective circuit in the MIEN program prevents an overdose of HF
voltage and HF current. If the output current is too high, the fusible link in the protective circuit trips.
The test checks whether the correct fuse is inserted. The manufacturer of the fuse and the fuse rating
can be found in the parts list.
•
Testing the voltage limitation with no load
Activate test program 18.
In the AUTO CUT display panel the set value of HF output voltage is displayed. With the CUT “Up/
Down” buttons, the HF output voltage can be adjusted in the range from 260Vp to 500 Vp (±50Vp).
Connect oscilloscope to the MIC output socket NE1 and CUT.
The highest HF peak voltage at the AUTO CUT Effect 3 (15 W) setting is 340 Vp. At this voltage the
protective circuit must not yet impose any limitation.
The protective circuit limits the output voltage from 360 Vp upward. Range in which the limitation
must be activated: 360–450 Vp.
At the setting of 499 Vp the fuse will not trip and the operability of the protective circuit remains
intact.
ATTENTION!
As soon as the voltage limitation is activated, current flows through the protective diodes and the diodes heat
up. The duration of the test from the moment of voltage limitation must not exceed 5 seconds or else the
protective diodes break down and the circuit will have to be repaired.
120 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Voltage limitation at setting of 415 V p.
ATTENTION! The test duration must
not exceed 5 seconds!
Voltage limitation at setting of 499 V p.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
ATTENTION! The test duration must
not exceed 5 seconds!
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
121 / 266
122 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 17
Brightness setting of the 7-segment displays
General description
Using this program, you can adapt the brightness of the 7-segment displays in 10 stages to the lighting
conditions of the room.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Int
xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
• Int Intensity (brightness) of the displays
• xx Present intensity, adjustable from 1...10.
You can make the intensity brighter using the “Up” (8) key or darker using the “Down” (9) key.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
After termination of the test program, store the brightness setting with key 3.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
123 / 266
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time with
AUTO START
General description
Using this program, you can change the specifications for the delay time when activating AUTO START.
The delay time is the time which passes after the forceps contacted the tissue and the HF generator is
actuated.
So that the operating surgeon can know whether the forceps have contacted the tissue, the AUTO BIPOLAR activation display (blue triangle in the AUTO-BIPOLAR field) switches on at contact. Then the delay
time starts. After the delay time has passed, the HF generator and the activation tone are switched on.
In case of error in the memory medium, the following basic settings have been preset:
ICC 350 and ICC 300:
ICC 200:
AUTO START 0:
0 seconds,
AUTO START 1:
0.5 seconds,
AUTO START 2:
1 second;
AUTO START:
0.5 seconds.
After starting Test program 23, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
SEt
Up
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tt.t
Time setting
Possible from 0.1 to 10 seconds in the following time steps:
from 0.1 to 2.0 seconds in 0.1 seconds steps
from 2.0 to 10.0 seconds in 0.5 seconds steps.
Procedure for ICC 350
AUTO START
Setting range
0
0 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 1
1
1 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 2
2
2 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 10 seconds
You can set and store the delay time for every user-specific program 0 to 9 and for every AUTO-START
time (0, 1 and 2).
Since the AUTO-START time 0 can be no longer than AUTO-START time 1, it is best to proceed from the
longest time for AUTO START 2 and then set the times for AUTO START 1 and AUTO START 0.
124 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time for
AUTO START
NOTE
You will find the assignment of keys with the numbers given below on pages 1-4 (Calling up of the test
program mode) of this Service Manual.
1. Using key 2
Set program number
2. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 2
3. Using “Up” or “Down” key Set the required time
4. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 1
5. Using “Up” or “Down” key Set the required time
6. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 0
7. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
8. Using key 1
Store the set values.
Steps 1 to 8 can be repeated individually for every required program.
Then exit the test program using key 3.
Procedure for ICC 300
AUTO START
Setting range
0
0 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 1
1
1 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 2
2
2 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 10 seconds
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
For every AUTO START time (0, 1 and 2), you can set and store a delay time. Since the AUTO-START time
0 cannot be any longer than the AUTO-START time 1, it is best to proceed from the longest time for AUTO
START 2 and then set the times for AUTO START 1 and AUTO START 0.
1. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 2
2. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
3. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 1
4. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
5. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 0
6. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
7. Using key 3
Exit the test program and the set values
are stored.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
125 / 266
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time for
AUTO START
Procedure for ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
SEt
Up
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tt.t
For the AUTO START function, you can set and store a delay time.
1. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
2. Using key 3
The set values are stored and the test program is
exited.
126 / 266
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Chapter 2
ERROR list
ERROR list V 4.X
ERBOTOM ICC 350 (V4.0, V2.0), ICC 300 (V3.0),
ICC 200 (V2.0)
Automatic error detection, indication and documentation
ERBOTOM ICC series high-frequency surgical units are equipped with a device for automatic error detection,
indication and documentation (ERROR monitor).
Error detection, indication, documentation
For ERBOTOM ICC series equipment as of software version 2.0 / 4.0, the ERROR monitor can, depending
on the type of equipment and its outfit, detect up to 91 currently occurring errors (ERROR) and indicate them
on the display.
Error numbers (ERROR nos.) are assigned to the various errors. If an error is detected, it is immediately
reported. The error report is both visual and audible.
The error numbers of detected errors are automatically stored chronologically. Since only 10 memory locations
are available, only the last 10 error messages are displayed. If the same error is detected several times in a row,
the corresponding error number is then saved only once in consideration of the limited number of available
memory locations. The error numbers documented in memory can be displayed via Test program 2 and
deleted.
Troubleshooting for ICC family equipment
The ICC unit family is equipped with an error detection system which detects and stores the last 10 errors
detected in an ERROR list. This error memory can be called up via Test program no. 2. The user should thus
be capable of localizing errors himself and deciding whether this is an operating error or an error in the
accessories, which he can possibly eliminate himself, or whether it is necessary to make use of the technical
service.
If there is a complete failure of the system and no display is visible, the power supply may have been
interrupted or the voltage supply inside the unit is defective. In such a case, first check whether the outlet
used is live or a fuse in the house power supply has been tripped (Does a different unit function at this
outlet?). If the outlet used is live, check the powerline to the unit and replace if necessary. The equipment
fuses on the rear panel should also be checked and replaced if necessary.
ATTENTION!
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Only use original fuses of the same specification.
If these efforts bring no results, there is probably an error within the unit. You should then contact the
technical service.
For a malfunction with a properly functioning display but with no indication of an ERROR number in the
display, the error may be located in defective accessories. It is possible, for example, that there may be a
defect in the fingerswitch or footswitch, or a disruption in the associated connecting cable. The cause of the
error may be determined by exchanging the accessories used.
To determine other causes of errors, an ERROR number in the unit display indicates the course of further
action according to the following table.
2
ERROR LIST
129 / 266
ERROR no. 1–13
Error
no. Designation and remedies
No HF voltage present at the HF voltage sensor. Error in the HF generator.
1 Short circuit in accessories: Replace accessories.
Other equipment error: Technical Service.
2
HF output voltage too high, error in the HF generator.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
The switched-mode power supply unit supplies no voltage during activation, error in the
3 switched-mode power supply unit.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
The switched-mode power supply unit supplies too high a voltage upon activation of the ST
4 generator, error in the switched-mode power supply unit.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
LF leakage current is > 50 µA and flows into the unit via the neutral electrode.
Check positioning of the patient, whether there is contact with the infusion stand or the like.
5
Other defective equipment connected to the patient?
Are the potential equalization and grounded conductor OK?
6
During the activation phase, the safety shutoff feature output reports "ON".
Equipment error: Technical Service.
7
During the activation phase, the safety shutoff feature output reports "OFF".
Equipment error: Technical Service.
8 not assigned
Maximum continuous time limit exceeded.
9 Only activate the unit if necessary. The time limit monitor is a safety feature and should
generally only be increased with a strict indication using Test program 10 in the setup.
10
Error during activation of the AUTO CUT, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
11
Error during activation of AUTO COAG 1 or AUTO COAG 2, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
12
Error during activation of AUTO BIPOLAR, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
Error during activation of AUTO CUT:
- NESSY: measured NE impedance is > 120 ohms.
- Using Test program no. 7, split electrodes were set: NE impedance < 10 ohms.
13
Check NE cable.
Check NE contact surface: Short circuit? Is NE stuck to metal?
If necessary, set required neutral electrode using Test program 7.
130 / 266
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 14–22
Error
no. Designation and remedies
14 (not assigned)
15 (not assigned)
16 (not assigned
Error during activation. HF leakage current > 300 mA.
17 Check position of the patient: Contact points with infusion stand or the like.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation. 150 mA < HF leakage current < 300 mA.
18 Check position of the patient . Eliminate contact points with infusion stand or the like.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation of AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG: NESSY current density error.
Check NE cable for interruption.
19
Check contact surface and application point of the NE.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
For AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG: NESSY current symmetry error.
Variably high current flowing into the joint phases of the NE.
20
Check cable to the NE (interruption).
Check NE contact surface.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
21
Current symmetry error.
See ERROR 20.
When switching on the power, AUTO CUT is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether a
22
key or pedal is stuck or the switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
131 / 266
ERROR no. 23–33
Error
no. Designation and remedies
Switch on the power, AUTO COAG 1 is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether
23
key or pedal is stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
When switching on the power, AUTO COAG 2 is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether
24
key or pedal is stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
When switching on the power, AUTO BIPOLAR is switched on by footswitch.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check footswitch as to whether key or pedal is
25
stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Contact is detected when switching on the power. Contact monitor is active.
Check the forceps connecting cable or check forceps for a short circuit. The forceps tips are
26
touching or lying on a conductive base: Isolate forceps.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Overheating! Internal unit temperature > 100°C. Permissible output power is reduced.
Unit generated max. power for a longer period of time.
27 Allow unit to cool down.
Coagulation electrode too large?
Short circuit or error in accessories?
Activation signal for the blue footswitch button already on.
Is the blue footswitch button depressed? Is the button or switch stuck? If necessary, briefly
28
unplug the footswitch as a test.
First preselect footswitch on the front panel and then switch on.
For Spanish version:
29 During activation, a further activation signal is detected.
Double activation not permissible.
30
Mismatch! Over a time period > 5 sec , the load resistance is < 50 ohms.
Check accessories for short circuit.
Mismatch! The output power is > 100 watts. During activation, the load resistance remains
31 constant and < 300 ohms. After a prescribed time, ERROR 31 appears.
Check accessories for short circuit.
Multiple activation detected.
32 No simultaneous activation via several sources.
If unsuccessful, unit is then defective. Technical Service.
33
132 / 266
At the end of activation, a new activation signal immediately appears.
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 34–48
Error
no. Designation and remedies
34
Multiple activation detected during AUTO BIPOLAR .
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
There is already a new activation signal during AUTO BIPOLAR with AUTO STOP or AUTO
35 START.
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
When pressing the BIPOLAR AUTO START key, there is already an AUTO START signal .
The contact monitor is activated.
36
see ERROR no. 26.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation.
37 At the point in time of activation, the power supply unit voltage has not yet dissipated. Power
supply discharge faulty. Equipment defect: Technical Service.
38
During AUTO START activation, the contact resistance is < 6 ohms.
Inspection of the forceps and supply cable for short circuit.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
39 not assigned
40
Monitor ST generator time control. Output error: ST time control for FORCE and SPRAY.
Actual value > set value plus 20%: Technical Service necessary.
41
Like Error 40, but
Actual value < set value minus 20%: Technical Service necessary.
42
Like Error 41, but
Actual value > set value minus 40%: Technical Service necessary.
43
Monitor of ST generator time control.
Output error. No frequency feedback: Equipment defect: Technical Service.
44
Monitor of the ST generator output voltage.
Output error: Equipment defect: Technical Service.
45
HF generator error during self-check.
HF output voltage too low : Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Self-check.
46 Error within the permissible limits during comparison of the power supply unit voltage with the
HF output voltage. Equipment defect: Technical Service.
HF generator error during self-check.
47 Like Error 46, but error outside permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Patient current.
48 No signal from the output current monitor.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
133 / 266
ERROR no. 49–82
Error
no. Designation and remedies
49 not assigned
A key on the front panel is depressed.
50
Operating field key is depressed or defective during the power start-up phase. If it cannot be
to 70
corrected, then equipment defect: Technical Service.
71
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Start or stop bit error or number of bits incorrect.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
72
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Signal in receiving register has not been read out.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
73
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Parity sign placed incorrectly.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
74
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: No connection to PC available.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
75
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Sign stays in transmitter buffer. SIO module not transmitting.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
76
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Interface storage takes too long; hard disk is too slow.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
77
not assigned
to 79
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: No valid frequency for the 5-stage intensity setting.
80 Replace remote control.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: The intensity setting was set to 0 during activation.
81 Do not set anything during activation.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: NESSY measurement: NE impedance > 120 ohms.
82 Test the neutral electrode and supply line or position of the NE on the patient.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
134 / 266
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 83–91
Error
no. Designation and remedies
83
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too high, but still within the permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
84
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too high; outside permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: No output current. Interruption of the circuit or failure of the frequency
feedback system.
85 Check the neurotest cable supply lines or the handle, NE and cable and replace if
necessary.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too low, but within the permissible limits.
Check the neurotest cable supply lines, or the handle, NE and cable, and replace if
86
necessary.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too low; current is below the permissible limit.
87 Check neurotest cable.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
88
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Max. time limit has run out. The time limit monitor is a safety measure.
Only activate unit if necessary.
89
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: When switching on the power, already a neurotest activation signal.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
90
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Electronic fuse triggered or frequency feedback system has failed.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: After switching on the neurotest function using the intensity adjuster, a
test determined that the electronic fuse was not triggered or the frequency feedback system
91
has failed.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
135/ 266
136 / 266
2 ERROR LIST
Chapter 3
Circuit description
Motherboard
The following functions are also found on the motherboard:
•
Starting current limitation
•
Supply voltage changeover and power rectification
•
Power transformer for low voltage supply
•
Rectifier for low voltage
•
Chipselect generation and level adaptation of TTL level to 15 volt level for CMOS components.
•
Generation of the external control bus and of signal lines from the data from PIO outputs
•
HF leakage current measurement
•
HF leakage current limitation
•
Changeover between floating and capacitance-grounded output
•
Input circuit for the footswitch
•
Various level adaptations.
The motherboard detects the other PCBs via connectors and contacts them.
Starting current limitation
The supply voltage moves from the power supply to the motherboard via the connector J 11.
Immediately after switching on the ICC, the supply unit capacitors are charged which causes a heavy
power surge by which, without protective measures, the fuses for the in-house electrical system would be
triggered.
Therefore a starting current limitation has been realized on the motherboard which limits the current peak
to noncritical values after switching on.
The corresponding power current first flows into the ICC via the resistor R5 and the fuse F1. The relay
contacts REL 1 are still briefly opened. Power current is therefore temporarily limited to noncritical values
due to resistor R5.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
As soon as the 24 volt supply voltage is available, relay REL 1 can pick up, bridges resistor R5 and fuse F1
with its relay contacts, and relieves both of them. This short span of time is sufficient to effectively limit the
starting power surge.
LED D2 lights red when the relay REL 1 is actuated and thus serves as a control.
Supply voltage switchover and power rectification
The unit can be changed over either to the 230 volt or 115 volt supply voltage range. The remaining voltage
deviations within the specification are offset by the controlled power supply units.
The supply voltage can be switched over by shifting the connectors J 16 to J 22.
In the 230 volt range, the bridge-connected rectifier BR1 functions as intended as a true bridge circuit. The
wire bridges must be connected as follows:
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
139 / 266
Motherboard
J 15
free
J 16–J 20
grey
J 17–J 21
brown
J 18–J 22
yellow
J 19
free
In the 115 volt range, the bridge-connected rectifier BR1 operates with the electrolyte capacitors C6, C7 as
a voltage doubler. The wire bridges must be connected as follows:
J 15–J 20
grey
J 16
free
J 17
free
J 18–J 21
brown
J 19–J 22
yellow
For the low voltage supply, there is a transformer TR 1 with rectifier BR2 and filter capacitor C15 on the
motherboard. Here an unregulated DC voltage is provided in the 24 volt range.
Since data are present on the databus for all parts of the circuit simultaneously, it is necessary to separately
determine for which part of the circuit the currently output data is intended. This is realized by the “Chipselect
method” by which the chip to be addressed is selected and addressed using a special “Chipselect signal.”
This signal activates only one among a number of addressable modules. These signals are generated within
the Multiplexer IC 4 and converted in the transistor arrays IC10 and IC11 to 15 volt CMOS level.
The PIO (Parallel Input Output module) produces data in a brief period of time for many different target
assemblies. While the data are only present briefly at the PIOs, the data for target assemblies should be
present longer. For this an independent external control bus and independent control lines are used. The
data for the signal lines are stored in the D-flipflops IC2 and IC3 and brought to the 15 volt CMOS level in
the transistor arrays IC8 and IC9.
For the external control bus, the PIO data only need to be brought to the 15 volt CMOS level in IC7.
Limitation of the high frequency leakage currents
High frequency leakage currents are effectively limited in the ICC. The transformer UE1 is used for limitation.
All lines which lead to a high-frequency output socket on the ICC are directed via transformer UE1. If no
high frequency leakage currents occur, the HF current flows from the generator via the patient to the neutral
electrode and via the transformer UE1 back to the generator completely.
Therefore ideally, the current flowing away is equal to the current flowing back. The windings of the
transformer UE1 are switched in such a way that the resulting magnetic field is canceled by the current
flowing back and forth. Thus the windings of this transformer have no inductivity; the current can flow
unimpeded.
However, if high-frequency leakage currents do occur within the patient circuit, the current flowing back
and forth is generally not equal. The magnetic fields in the transformer UE1 do not cancel each other out;
140 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Motherboard
an inductivity of the coils results which limits the high-frequency leakage current with this inductive
impedance.
Monitoring the high-frequency leakage currents
As intended, the high-frequency current should only be used for cutting or coagulating tissue. To do this, it
must flow to the active electrode in a small area and with a high current density, and flow back again from
the neutral electrode over a large area and with a low current density.
However, if the body of the patient is in contact with another electrically conductive object, the current may
also take an undesirable path and, for example, cause a burn there. These undesirable currents are known as
“leakage currents”. It is therefore important to know whether such a leakage current is flowing and how
large it is.
Such leakage current cannot simply disappear, but must instead always flow back to the generator. The
largest proportion of these high-frequency leakage currents flow back to the generator via the power cable
and the grounded conductor.
Since all power lines and the grounded conductor are directed through the ring core of the coil L1, a
corresponding high frequency voltage is induced if HF leakage current is present in the coil L1, which is
rectified with diode D1, restricted with D6, D7 and smoothed in capacitor C13. For further processing, this
DC voltage is fed to the processor system via the isolation amplifier IC12.
Changeover between flowing and capacitance-grounded output
High-frequency surgical units are generally available either in “capacitance ground of the neutral electrode”
or “floating neutral electrode” connection systems, whereby no components are integrated between the
connection to the neutral electrode and chassis in the latter connection system.
Both connection systems have advantages and disadvantages.
The advantage of capacitance ground is that the feed line from the neutral electrode to the patient is grounded
at a high frequency via the capacitor and the risk of burns is reduced. However, it is a disadvantage that
impermissible low-frequency leakage currents may flow through this capacitor during cardiac operations.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
If the neutral electrode is operated as floating, on the other hand, the low-frequency leakage currents can be
kept very easily below the limit value of 10 or 50 mA during cardiac operations, but the risk of burns is
increased in this connection system since the line from the neutral electrode is about half the high frequency
voltage of the generator.
With the ICC high-frequency surgical units, the low-frequency leakage current to the patient is measured.
At the first malfunction, this must not exceed 50 mA. Once this condition is ensured, the unit is permitted
to carry the CF designation (Cardiac Floating). If the possible low-frequency leakage current is under 500
mA in the first case of malfunction, the unit is therefore not suitable for operations on the heart and has the
designation BF (Body Floating).
Initially the ICC is capacitance-grounded via capacitors C30 and C31 and the relay contact REL 2. The
advantages of capacitance ground are fully exploited. The low-frequency leakage current is measured via
the prescribed simulation R25, C28. If for any reason a low-frequency leakage current should appear, it is
then evaluated. If it exceeds the limit of 50 mA, the relay contacts REL 2 are then opened and thus a lowfrequency leakage current can no longer flow. The ICC thus fulfills the CF requirement for cardiac surgery
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
141 / 266
Motherboard
in every situation.
The voltage occurring in the simulation is proportional to the current and is compared in the operation
amplifier IC14 functioning as a comparator to the maximum permissible value that is prescribed and
adjustable via the resistor divider R22 and TP1. The signal for switching over the relay REL 2 is present at
the BF / CF output.
Footswitch input circuit
The footswitch is operated at a DC voltage of 15 volts via a multipole line. Since the footswitch connection,
due to its length of up to several meters, can also function as a receiving antenna and absorb interferences,
an RC low-pass is connected directly to the input sockets of the ICC which severely dampens high interference
frequencies. The footswitch signals are then regenerated using the buffer IC 13.
For further processing in the processor, the output signals from IC 13 are adapted to the TTL level of the
processor. To do this, the noninverting buffer IC5 is used.
Further signals are converted in the same manner from 15 volt CMOS level to the TTL level in the buffers
IC1 and IC6.
142 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
CPU board
Slot J1
The following functions are located on the PCB:
•
The CPU with RAM and EPROM
•
The clock generator
•
The voltage supply monitor
•
The digital input and output via Parallel Input/Output modules (PIO)
•
Analog inputs via an A/D converter
•
The Chipselect generation
•
The safety interlock signal for controlling the activation signals.
As the central processing unit (CPU), the CMOS microprocessor Z84 C00 (IC1) is used together with the
EPROM 27 C 512 as the program memory (IC3) and the battery-buffered RAM 5864 as the main memory
and constant memory (IC2)
The clock pulse for operation of the computer is produced in the quartz clock generator IC16 and then processed
in the two D-flipflops IC13 to a half-frequency, counterphase clock.
In case of a breakdown of the supply voltage, the current computer data must still be “saved” and stored in the
battery-buffered RAM. All these tasks are supported by the supervisor circuit IC10 (MAX 691).
The supply voltage is monitored via the resistor voltage divider R3, R4 and the “Powerfail” input (Pin 9,
IC10). The data are buffered by a 3 volt lithium battery BT1 which is connected at Pin 1 of the IC10. The
circuit also monitors the voltage of this buffer battery. When switching on, the circuit affects a reset of the
computer system to a specific initial status and provides the monitoring and functional capability through an
integrated “watchdog” circuit.
In addition, the +5 volt supply voltage is also monitored in a separate circuit via resistor R9, diode D1, buffer
capacitor C13 and resistor R7 via the PIO IC6, Pin 27.
The digital inputs and outputs of the computer are taken care of by the Parallel Input/Output circuits (PIOs,
IC4 to IC7). The input and output ports are specified and connected by the program.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Analog dimensions, processed by the processor, move via the level adaptation (resistor network RN1, resistors
R15 to R18) and simultaneous low-pass (capacitors C16 to C19) to the 4-channel analog-digital converter
IC14, from whence the data are available to the processor.
Since all system data are present together at the databus, the system must be able to address the target modules
to which the data apply. This occurs in a processor system by means of the Chipselect lines by which very
specific modules can be addressed via the assistance of “selection signals”.
The Chipselect signals are created in the decoder IC9 from the addresses A3, A4 and A5. Depending on the
address, only one output line each is switched to logical low.
All signals from the various fingerswitches and footswitches are summarized and verified in a safety interlock
signal as to whether any impermissible overlappings or impermissible conditions are produced. If no
impermissible overlappings are determined, the safety interlock signal generates a signal which identifies the
passed on data as save. This logic is accepted by the programmable controller IC17.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
143 / 266
Low voltage supply
Slot J2
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Voltage regulator for +24 volts
•
Voltage regulator for +15 volts
•
Voltage regulator for +5 volts
•
Voltage regulator for –15 volts
•
Three sound generators for the acoustic signals
•
Circuit for tone selection
•
Tone output amplifier with volume control.
Voltage regulator for +24 volts
The unstabilized DC voltage, gained on the motherboard via transformer TR1 and bridge-connected rectifier
BR2, moves to the input of a switched-mode power supply unit. This consists of the integrated switching
controller IC3, the memory choke L1 and the free-wheeling diode D1 with the necessary wiring. The
output voltage is adjusted via the voltage divider R22, R23.
At the output of the switching controller, a stabilized DC voltage of +24 volts is available. The presence of
this voltage is indicated by the LED6.
This voltage is mainly used to operate the relays in the surgical unit.
Voltage regulation for +15 volts
The instable input voltage, the presence of which is indicated by LED 4, moves to the switching
controller IC 1. The circuit extensively corresponds to the +24 volt regulation, however the transformer
UE 1 is used here as the memory choke which simultaneously taps a part of the connector voltage
occurring there for the operation of the – 15 volt regulation.
The output voltage of 15 volts prescribed by the divider ratio of the resistors R30 and R31 is used to
operate the CMOS circuits and the operation amplifier. Its proper presence is signaled by the LED 2.
Voltage regulation for – 15 volts
The negative operation voltage of – 15 volts is mainly required for the negative voltage supply of the
operation amplifier. Since the capacity of this voltage source is just minimal due to the circuit, a simple
regulating circuit could be used. The principle of analog regulation is thus sufficient, and the resulting
losses are minimal.
The switched-mode voltage tapped from the switched-mode power unit for + 15 volts at transformer UE 1
is rectified through the diode D6 such that a negative DC voltage is present at the input of the analog
regulator IC10. This voltage is stabilized by the fixed voltage controller IC10 to –15 volts. The proper
presence of this voltage is indicated by the LED1.
144/ 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Low voltage supply
Slot J2
Voltage regulation for +5 volts
A controlled voltage of +5 volts is mainly required to operate the CPU, the TTL logic modules and the light
displays on the front panel. Since the capacity of this voltage source is relatively high, a switched-mode
power supply unit was used.
The circuit corresponds extensively to that of the +24 volt regulator: The instable input voltage is stabilized
to +5 volts by means of the regulator IC6. The proper presence of the output voltage is indicated by the
LED3.
From Pin 3 of the integrated switching controller IC1 of the +15 volt voltage regulation, a connection leads
to the transistor T2 of the +5 volt control. In this way it is possible to block the function of the +5 volt power
supply unit as long as the +15 volt supply is not available. This measure is used to increase the functional
security of the unit.
Tone generators for the signal tones
The tone generators are used to audibly signal all operating and danger conditions when operating the
surgical unit. To do this, three tone generators are available, the signals of which may be mixed with one
another to produce pleasant and differing tones in this way.
The timer IC4 produces the tone frequency for the first tone, which can be adjusted using the trim
potentiometer TP2 at 493 Hz.
Timer IC5 produces the tone frequency for the second tone, which can be adjusted using the trim
potentiometer TP3 at 414 Hz.
Timer IC7 produces the tone frequency for the third tone, which can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer
TP4 at 329 Hz.
The generated tone frequencies can now be switched on selectively using the analog switches on the IC8
and mixed with one another. The combination of individual tones is prescribed by the program and is
selected using the D-flipflops of the IC9 as a target memory and switched through using the analog switches
of the IC8. Via resistors R5, R7, R9, R24, R10 and R16, the tone frequencies are combined so that one
sound can result from several individual frequencies.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The volume of the operating tones can be adjusted using a potentiometer which is connected in parallel to
resistor R11.
The volume of the alarms must not be reduced. For this reason, the reduction of amplitudes by means of the
integrated analog switch IC8, Pin 10-11, which is also controlled by the CPU, can be passed by so that the
tone signal in this case is reproduced with the maximum amplitude at the tone output amplifier IC 2.
The R37, C9, C10, C11, R39 network is used for sound shaping, so that a pleasant sound results in the
loudspeaker which follows the tone amplifier.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
145 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
Measured value acquisition and adjustment
•
The contact monitor
•
Actuation and power setting of the ST output stage
•
Actuation of the power module
•
Synchronization of the QK output stage
•
Hardware electronic safety circuits
•
Spark control
•
Actuation of the QK output stage.
Measured value acquisition and adjustment
The measurement signals, which are triggered mainly to the Senso-board as well as to other parts of the
entire unit, move first to the control board where they usually must still be adjusted in order to finally move
on to the processor.
For most inputs, an input circuit consists of a variable voltage divider with which the signal voltages can be adjusted.
Various signal voltages, the values of which are needed very quickly by the processor system, proceed via
the amplifiers IC1 and IC2 directly to the processor. (See diagram page 2/3).
Other signals which are not required for fast processing can be fed to the processor system in multiplex
operation. (Circuit diagram page 3/3). These signals are fed to the 16-channel multiplex IC 3, scanned in
chronological order, then amplified in the operation amplifier IC1 and only then fed one after another to the
processor system (output ANALOG 4).
The individual operating voltages, for example, are determined in this way:
The +15 volt operating voltage is fed via the resistor divider R39, R40 to the multiplexer.
The +24 volt operating voltage is fed via the resistor divider R41, R42 to the multiplexer.
The –15 volt operating voltage is first fed via R31 to the operation amplifier IC2 by inverting it. Now the
voltage can also be processed as a positive parameter via the multiplexer which only switches through
positive signals.
The multiplexer IC3 receives its address actuation A0 to A3 from the control bus via the target memory (Dflipflop) IC19.
The contact monitor
In the bipolar operating mode, it is necessary that the generator be switched on via the forceps when
biological tissue is found between the forceps tips. This is the purpose of the contact monitor. It should
switch on the generator at a tissue impedance of 2.5 kOhm.
In principle, two starting points can be specified and adjusted. The appropriate valid area is prescribed by
the control bus, stored in target memory IC20 and switched through there according to the activated output
(BER_1 or BER_2).
146 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
For example, if area 1 is activated, the emitter from transistor T2 is set high and gives its output voltage via
the trim potentiometer TP 11, resistor R45 and diode D2 to the measurement line U_NETZT, which also
leads at the power module to the sensor line of the switched-mode power supply's output voltage, but at the
same time also to the measurement system of the processor (trim potentiometer TP1 on the control board).
Transistor T2 can therefore be regarded as an extra-low voltage power supply, the output voltage of which
the HF generator of the power module uses to produce a minimal HF voltage and emit this as a test voltage
to the bipolar socket.
The internal impedance of this mini power supply unit is adjusted via the trim potentiometer TP11.
If the generator is now loaded with the tissue in the forceps (or with a 2.5 kOhm impedance), the supply
voltage at the internal impedance of the mini power supply unit collapses by a specific amount.
This voltage collapse is measured by the processor system and compared with the prescribed set values. If
they agree, the main power supply unit is switched on and the HF generator supplies the preset power.
The mini power supply unit cannot be fed in reverse due to the diode D2 (protective diode).
Since the internal impedance can be changed via the trim potentiometer TP11, the starting point of the
contact monitor can be adjusted here relative to the loaded impedance of the generator (tissue impendance).
Actuation and power setting of the ST output stage
The instruction to actuate the ST output stage arrives as a digital word from the control bus. From this, in
the digital-analog converter IC8, a DC voltage results which is transformed into a specific frequency in the
voltage frequency converter IC15, which can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer TP17.
The clock pulse generated in this way is the repetition frequency of the ST output stage actuation.
The pulse length of each individual actuation pulse is taken from the repetition frequency. Using the EXOR
of the IC12, a monoflop is realized with which the pulse length of the actuation pulse can be adjusted using
the trim potentiometer TP16. After a steepening of the edge, the actuation pulse TSI_STE is available at
output 11 of the EXOR IC12.
The generator power can be adjusted via the repetition frequency.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Actuation of the power module
The power generator of the power module is a feedback generator in principle which receives its actuation
pulse from the control board. The generator, however, does not begin to oscillate itself, but must instead be
started by a pulse.
The circuit receives the start-up signal and thus the necessary starting pulse from the processor via its PIO
on the CPU board and the transistor array IC8 on the motherboard.
The HF_EIN signal is directed to the comparator IC14 on the control board, the output of which remains at
logical HIGH during activation.
When starting up, the ascending signal is differentiated via the RC element R19, C73 and moves to the gate
of the transistor T4 which then briefly connects through and triggers the monoflop IC16. This is the starting
pulse at which the generator begins to operate. Using the trim potentiometer TP15, the pulse length of the
first monoflop in the IC16 can be set and resulting in a symmetrical sine-wave characteristic for the generator
signal (adaptation to the parallel oscillating circuit).
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
147 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
The resetting of the first monoflop IC16 triggers a secondary pulse in the second monoflop IC16 which
represents the true actuation pulse for the output stage driver. The length of this actuation pulse is adjustable
using the trim potentiometer TP14.
The power module generator is therefore always only initiated at the start of a half oscillation through the
actuation pulse. Due to the oscillating circuit as load resistance, the oscillation is extended into a complete
sine wave.
For all further oscillations during an activation phase, the generator is fed back via the resulting sinus
signal. A part of the output voltage U_PRIM of the parallel circuit is directed to the comparator IC14, the
output pulses of which now trigger the monoflops IC16.
The power module generator therefore continues to oscillate as a feedback generator until the activation
signal HF_EIN is reaccepted by the processor.
In this way, it is ensured that the generator always oscillates exactly at the resonance frequency of the
oscillating circuit and the operating frequency need not be manually adapted to the production-related
tolerances of the oscillating circuit elements.
Synchronization of the QK output stage
The quasi-complementary output stage operates at a serial oscillating circuit (on the power module) to
produce the required sine-wave current. This serial circuit affects the current in the QK output stage like a
flywheel and forces the temporal characteristic of the current to a certain extent.
Due to the improved efficiency and to protect the QK output stage, the transistors should always be switched
over at the same time that the current in the serial circuit has just made a zero crossing. This then reduces
the losses in the transistors.
This requirement can best be met according to the principle of feedback. Such a circuit principle has
already been realized in the actuation of the power module. There too, the advantages of digital control
signals with their low electrical power consumption and its versatility could be combined with the feedback
for a generator of high efficiency.
The generator cannot start by itself; it needs a starting circuit. The digital oscillator IC18 is a free-wheeling
oscillator, the frequency of which should be as close as possible to the frequency of the serial circuit. Its
output signal is directed to the priority encoder IC11. As long as no current flows in the QK output stage,
the measurement signal of the current U_IHP is zero (measurement point MP1). The comparator IC9
detects no current at input 9, therefore its output signal is low and the monoflop IC13 produces no pulses.
Its output is then continuously low and thus also the selector S1 of the priority encoder IC11. As a result,
the inputs IA2 and IA3 are switched through to the output. In this way, the signal for the starting circui IC18
or actuating the QK output stage is switched at the start.
Once the QK output stage has “started up”, a current is produced there which, at sufficient level, exceeds
the threshold of the comparator IC9, Pin 10. Since the current in the QK output stage is half-wave-shaped,
a pulse results at the output of the comparator with the frequency of the QK output stage. This pulse
triggers the monoflop IC13 at input 4. The ON time has been selected somewhat longer than the period
length of the HF signal of the QK output stage, so that the monoflop does not drop out as long as pulses
from the generated HF retrigger this monoflop (principle of the watchdog circuit). The monoflop increases
the selector input of the priority encoder IC11 to high-level. In this way, the signal from the start generator
148 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
is no longer switched through for actuation of the QK output stage, but instead the output signal of the
comparator IC9, PIN 12.
This comparator detects the zero crossings of the high frequency current of the QK output stage and provides
a pulse at the rate of the HF at the priority encoder which switches this rate through to the actuation with
sufficient current flow of the output stage. In this way, the actuation has now been switched over from freewheeling by means of the start generator in a no-load case to feedback current control in a load case.
Hardware electronic safety circuits
The current from the QK output stage is measured one more time:
First the measurement voltage is divided by means of the divider R57, R61, then rectified using diode D10
and an average is generated using the time constants from the resistor R50 and the capacitor C10. As a
result, the comparison voltage from the divider is present at the input of the comparator IC4, on the one
hand, and on the other, the average of a voltage which corresponds to the average current of the output
stage. If the average output stage current exceeds the set threshold, the comparator tilts. Its output signal
blocks actuation of the output stage via the AND gate IC7, Pin 4, and the QK output stage is blocked for a
specific minimum time prescribed by the monoflop IC10, part 2. In this way, the circuit is provided with a
recovery time and a pump effect is avoided.
This is therefore an electronic fuse for the QK output stage.
In a similar manner, further measurement dimensions are monitored not only through software, but also
through hardware:
Voltage and current of the patient circuit are directed via their parameters UP_HF and IP_HF from the
Senso-board on the comparator IC6. This also applies to the voltage from the power supply unit U_NETZT
and its current U_INT from the power module.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The integrated module IC6 is a comparator, the threshold voltage of which can be preset as a digital word
via the control bus. In this way, the threshold voltage can be adapted to current requirements prescribed by
the processor. The comparator compares the analog instantaneous values with those limit values set by the
processor and passes its Yes/No decisions on to the NOR circuit IC5. There the signals are summarized and
directed to gate IC7. If one single parameter has exceeded its limit value, the QK output stage actuation is
blocked by the AND circuit IC7. At the same time, the monoflop IC10, Part 1, is triggered, maintaining the
blockade for a specific minimum time, so that a pump effect caused by switching off and back on again too
quickly is avoided.
Via the second part of the AND circuit IC7, further important enable signals are controlled for the QK
output stage:
•
Is there an enable signal from the processor?
•
Is the safety interlock signal giving its enable?
•
Is there currently no reset of the processor?
If any of these questions can be answered with NO, the QK output stage is blocked.
The spark control
Several ICC units offer both a control of the HF output voltage as well as optionally a control of the
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
149 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
sparking which occurs during the cutting and coagulation process at the active electrode. Both control
principles have concrete applications.
The control of spark intensity can be activated via the “HIGH CUT” key.
On the Senso-board, the DC voltage U_FUNKE occurring during a spark is gathered via an isolation
amplifier (description there) and directed to the control-board.
The required set value of the spark intensity is transmitted via the control bus to the digital analog converter
IC8. Its analog output signal is combined and compared at the comparator IC4 with the actual value of the
spark U_FUNKE. If the actual value is greater than the set value, output 12 tilts to frame potential and
illuminates the red LED D1. In addition, the output signal moves to the input Pin 2 of the NOR circuit IC5.
The gate IC7 with the monoflop IC10 switches off the QK output stage for a minimum period of time. In
this way, the supply voltage for the HF generator is reduced and therefore also the intensity of the spark.
Actuation of the QK output stage
The MOS field effect transistors of the quasi-complementary output stage require brief start or stop pulses
for their actuation during the zero crossing of the sinusoidal output current.
As is known from the section “Synchronization of the QK output stage”, there is a pulse at the output of the
priority encoder IC11 which is already synchronous to the zero crossings of the output current. This pulse
must now be prepared in such a way that a start or stop pulse is produced for each of the two output stage
transistors at the right point in time respectively.
If one assumes that neither of the two QK transistors are switched conductively after a pause, Transistor A
first requires a start pulse. The transistor then switches on and produces a sinusoidal half-wave within the
oscillating circuit of the QK output. At the end of this half-wave, this Transistor A must be switched back
off using a brief pulse. Then Transistor B should take over the second half-wave and be conductive. Therefore
Transistor B requires its short start pulse after Transistor A has switched off. It remains conductive until the
zero crossing of the second half-wave and must be shut off again at its end using a pulse.
In this way, a complete sine-wave oscillation has resulted and the process repeats itself constantly until the
QK output stage is switched off.
The output of the circuit IC11 produces a pulse with every zero crossing on the sinus current. However, the
actuation requires, as described, two pulses during a half-wave, specifically a start and a stop pulse. It is
therefore necessary to double the frequency of the available pulse. This occurs in the EXOR gate IC12
together with the RC low-pass R67, C15. Using this low pass, the signal at input 1 of gate IC12 is slightly
delayed compared to input 2, which leads to an output pulse with the length of the delay time for every
change in the input signal. The input frequency is thus doubled. The resulting pulses are extremely short.
By means of small, though non-negligible running times in the circuit, the signal received in the meantime
is no longer completely synchronous to the current zero crossings of the output signal. Using the monoflop
IC13, the correct phase relationship of the actuation pulses to the output current can be re-established by
specifically extending the pulses. The necessary delay time can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer
TP13.
By halving the previously double frequency in D-flipflop IC21, Part 2, the original operating frequency of
the QK output stage is recreated with a pulse duty factor of 1:1. Output pin 13 has a HIGH level, while
Transistor A is addressed. The inverted output 12 has a HIGH level, while Transistor B of the QK output
150 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
stage is addressed. The output signals A and B thus serve in the selection of currently active transistors.
From the previously doubled frequency, the short start and stop pulses are produced for the respectively
active transistor.
The first part of the monoflop IC17 produces the start pulse, the second part the stop pulse.
The first part of the D-flipflop IC21 is additionally actuated by an ON_OFF signal for the safety circuits. In
this way, all start pulses can be suppressed on the one hand, while on the other, it is ensured that the
transistors can still be shut off in any case.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The arrangement of selection pulses for the individual transistors with the on/off pulses is made in the
NAND gate IC1 on the QK output stage.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
151 / 266
QC power stage
Slot J4
The QC output stage (30128- 528)
The following functions are located on the PCB:
•
Decoding of the switch signals
•
Power-on time-delay circuit
•
Preamplifier, driver and electrical isolation of actuation
•
Clamping circuit
•
Push-pull output stage.
The output stage acts as a power amplifier for high-frequency signals, as is required, for example, in switchedmode power supply units and high-frequency surgical units. This output stage is designed for push-pull
operation on account of the greater efficiency and larger possible output power. As there are frequently
problems in procuring and storing identical P and N channel transistors - which are required for a push-pull
output stage - it is advantageous to be able to use two transistors of the same type. This circuit is then called
a quasi complementary output stage, or QC output stage for short.
The aim of the development was to produce an output stage with the highest possible efficiency and a
sinusoidal output signal with the smallest possible proportion of harmonic frequencies. Actuation should
require as low a power as possible and preferably be possible in digital mode so that the transistors can be
used in switching operation with low power loss.
All the stated requirements led to the present circuit.
Circuit principle
The complementary output stage consists of two N channel MOS-FET transistors, T1 and T2, which are
operated alternately as switches. The amplified digital output signal is present at the source of transistor T1
and simultaneously at the drain of transistor T2, since these connections are conductively connected to each
other. However, since a sinusoidal output signal is a required condition, the output of the output stage is
switched to an oscillating circuit (which is located on the next PCB).
The QC output stage is actuated between the gate and source of the respective transistor, which always
leads to electric potential problems with this circuit logic, since the actuation signal has to be superimposed
on the output signal.
This problem can be solved by actuating the relevant transistor via a transformer. If this method is used for
both output stage transistors, it has the advantage that the actuation circuit can be completely isolated from
the output circuit and the high output voltages occurring in the event of a defect cannot damage the actuation
circuit.
The disadvantage, however, is that the transformer cannot transmit any DC signals.
This is where the gate-source capacitance of the MOS-FETs proves useful. Since this capacitance is of high
quality, the gate-source capacitance can maintain an applied charge for a sufficient length of time. The
clamping circuit consisting of diodes D8, D9, D10 and D5, D6, D7 has the effect that the gate-source
capacitance can be charged with a short positive pulse. This positive pulse is fed via diode D8 to the gate of
transistor T1 and charges the GS capacitance sufficiently for the transistor to be switched to a conducting
state.
152 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
QC power stage
Slot J4
This charge cannot then flow back into the actuation circuit after the actuation pulse has ended, since diode
D8 acts as a block and diode D9 also permits no reverse current due to its Z-diode characteristic. The result
is that the transistor remains in a conducting state as long as its GS capacitance has sufficient charge.
If, on the other hand, a sufficiently large negative pulse comes from the actuation circuit, the Z-diode
voltage at diode D9 is exceeded and the GS capacitance can be discharged again. Transistor T1 thereby acts
as a block.
It can thus be seen that a MOS-FET transistor can be operated in switching mode via such a clamping
circuit by means of a pulse transformer with short start and stop pulses.
Capacitors C4 and C5 are connected in parallel to the GS capacitance and support the effect described.
Since their capacitance is significantly higher than the corresponding gate-source capacitances, the circuit
becomes largely independent of parameter scatter of the gate-source capacitances of different production
batches.
It is the task of actuation to time the actuation process in such a way that each of the two power transistors
receives a short start pulse and, after a defined pause, a stop pulse at the right time. It must be ensured that
the two transistors are never switched to a conducting state simultaneously, since a short circuit of the
supply voltage would result!
Circuit description
The actuation signals are generated on the control board (30128-357). These signals are short pulses for
starting and stopping the output stage transistors and two additional pulses, one for selecting the upper
output stage transistor and the other for selecting the lower output stage transistor.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
These pulses come via connector J1 to the NAND gates ½ IC1 and IC4 on the QC board. There the "Start"
and "Transistor A" pulses, for example, are brought together (as are "Stop" and "Transistor A"). The following
pulse sequences are thus present at the outputs of IC 1:
•
Start transistor A
•
Stop transistor A
•
Start transistor B
•
Stop transistor B.
These pulses are each preamplified in the triply parallel gates of the NOR circuits IC 2 and IC3. The outputs
of IC2 and IC3 actuate the driver stages, each consisting of two parallel transistors T3 to T10. The output
signal of the four parallel drivers is then amplified to such a level that the pulse transformers UE1 and UE2
can be operated with sufficient energy.
In the case of a complementary output stage, it must be strictly ensured that the two output stage transistors
are not simultaneously in the activated state, as this would cause a short circuit across the two transistors
and damage the output stage beyond repair.
Therefore, the stop pulses generally have the highest priority. They ensure a safe state of the output stage
during undefined operation. The start pulses are separated in the actuation logic to ensure that only one
output stage transistor is actuated at any one time.
An undefined state could, however, occur in rare cases if the +15 V operating voltage is too low at any point
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
153 / 266
QC power stage
Slot J4
in time. For this possibility, in which the logic might operate undefined, a "Power-on time-delay circuit"
avoids undefined starting of the output stage transistor.
With transistor T11, the supply voltage VDD = + 15 V is monitored. If this voltage is missing, capacitor C10
is quickly discharged via diode D12. This logical LO signal is sent to the two NAND gates ½ IC 1 and
blocks the starting pulses. If the supply voltage is present, capacitor C10 is charged to 15 V via transistor
T11 and resistor R8 in a predefined delay time. This HI signal reaches the two NAND gates again (see
above) and enables the start pulses for the output stage.
On the secondary side of the driver transformers, short, steep spikes occur, initially a positive pulse for
starting, then a negative pulse for stopping the corresponding output stage transistor.
These spikes reach the gates of the MOS-FET transistors via the clamping circuit described above, and
switch the gates.
The amplified output signal is tapped at the two mutual connection points of the transistors.
154 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Power module
Slot J5
Power module UL
Slot J5
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
Serial oscillating circuit for the QC power stage
•
Generation of the operating voltage for the HF generator
•
Driver and output stage of the HF generator
•
Output circuit of the HF generator
•
Measurement of various operating parameters
Serial oscillating circuit for the QC power stage
The QC power stage has the task of generating a sine-wave current as free of distortion as possible. The QC
power stage is not used in the ICC to generate high-frequency power for cutting or coagulating, but instead
functions here as a switched-mode power supply unit with a high switching frequency and efficiency. The
QC transistors are always switched over in the zero crossing of the current. The current is forced at the
same time through the serial circuit from coil L2 and capacitor C17 into a sinusoidal shape.
Generation of the operating voltage of the HF generator
The high-frequency power is tapped via the transformer UE2 and rectified by means of the diodes D3, D4.
The capacitors C4, C10 are filter capacitors. With 22 µF, they can be measured relatively minimally and the
ripple of the output voltage is nevertheless small due to the high operating frequency. In this way, this
switched-mode power supply unit can also be stabilized very quickly.
The output DC voltage of the power supply unit is available at the cathode of diode D3 and is
a)
directed via the U–NT–STE connection to supply the ST output stage,
b)
used to operate the HF output stage via relay REL1.
The negative pole of the capacitor C10 leads to the chassis via the resistor R5. R5 is used as a shunt to
measure the output current taken from this power supply unit. The voltage alloted to R5 if used for
measurement by U–INT.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
In the activation pauses, the power supply unit can be discharged via NTE (power supply enable). To do
this, the transistor T3 is switched conductively and discharges the stored power supply voltage via the
resistor R12.
The power supply output voltage is divided into smaller values via the resistor divider R7, R8 and lead to
the measuring device (U-NETZT).
Via the relay REL1, the transformer UE2 can be switched over. With an activated relay, a higher output
voltage can be taken from the transformer. This is required to operate the ST output stage to generate
especially high voltage peaks. This high voltage is switched off to protect the HF output stage by means of
the second contact from relay REL1.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
155 / 266
Power module
Slot J5
Power module UL
Slot J5
Driver and output stage of the HF generator
The actuation signal for the HF output stage is generated on the control board (IC16) and fed to the power
module driver IC1 via the motherboard.
Due to the high-gate source capacitance of the output stage transistors T1 and T2, the driver must be able to
emit and accept high reactive currents when transferring this capacitance. That is why two drivers are
switched in parallel. The output current of the driver is restricted by the resistors R1 and R19 to protect the
driver.
The output stage transistors T1 and T2 are switched in parallel due to the necessary high current and
operate on output transformer UE1.
Output circuit of the HF generator
The output circuit of the output stage consists of the transformer UE1 on the primary side and the two
capacitors C5 and C7 switched in parallel. This parallel circuit is designed for the operating frequency of
the HF generator and forms a sine-wave voltage in a no-load case.
At the secondary side, there is a serial circuit made up of coil L1 and the capacitor C1. This serial circuit is
also designed for the operating frequency of the HF generator and produces a sine-wave current in the
output circuit.
In this way, in every load state of the generator, both the voltage and the current are sinusoidal.
Measurement of various operating parameters
The output current in the QC power stage flows via the transformer UE3 which is secondarily loaded with
the resistors R13, R14 and R15 and is used as a current transformer.
The voltage at these resistors corresponds to the output voltage of the QC power stage (half-cycle current)
and is routed as U-IHP to the control board.
The current in the power supply unit is measured at shunt R5 and routed as U-INT (voltage as a function of
the power supply current) to the control board.
The output voltage of the power supply unit is divided via the resistors R7, R8 and routed as U-NETZT to
the control board (IC14).
The HF primary voltage of the output stage is picked up at the oscillating circuit capacitor C5 and routed as
U-PRIM to the control board (IC14).
The output stage temperature is recorded by the thermistor NTC1 and routed as voltage from the divider
R2, NTC1 with the designation TEMP to the control board (IC2).
156 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
ST power stage
Slot J6
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Output stage with driver for high HF voltage pulses
•
Relay with relay control
•
Feedback of actuation frequency for the CPU
ST power stage
The ST power stage is used to generate high pulses for coagulation without a cutting effect, particularly for
quick superficial coagulation.
The designation “ST” output stage is derived from the abbreviation of spray generator for TUR.
The power control and the generation of actuation pulses are found on the control board.
The actuation pulses (TSI-STE) move to the driver IC4 and then to the ST output stage transistor T1. This
operates on the output transformer UE1, the secondary side of which emits the high frequency via the
capacitors C1 and C2 as well as the relays REL1, REL2 and REL3 at the connections AE and NE. The
emitted high frequency is fed to the outputs via the Senso-board.
The capacitors C1 and C2 serve as a high-pass for suppression of faradic effects and are also an additional
protection in isolating the patient circuit from the equipment circuit. Due to the necessary high electric
strength, two relay contacts each are switched in series.
The output relay is actuated via the relay driver IC7 which receives its actuation signals via the bus and the
target memory IC6 (D-flipflop).
The ST power stage is supplied with voltage that is switched with relay REL19 from the power module via
the connectors J2 and J3.
The integrated counter IC1 subdivides the frequency of the actuation signal of the ST output stage to a low
frequency, so that the frequency in the CPU can be determined by means of a counting loop.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Since the processor prescribes the actuation frequency, it receives feedback in this way as to whether the set
and actual values agree. This is important since the output power of the ST power stage is controlled via the
repetition frequency of the individual pulses.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
157 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Current monitor for the patient circuit
•
Voltage monitor for the patient circuit
•
Phase monitor for the patient circuit
•
Spark monitor for monitoring the sparking at the electrodes
•
Safety system for the neutral electrode (NESSY)
•
Relay control
Current monitor for the patient circuit
The high-frequency current moves from the generator to the Senso-board via the connectors J1 and J2. On
the way to the electrodes, the current is directed by the transformer UE1, the load resistors R11 and R12 of
which are transformed at a ratio of 2500:1 to the primary side and thus serve as a shunt for current
measurement.
The output voltage of the secondary winding is also proportionate to the high-frequency output current.
This voltage now moves to one of the operation amplifiers IC7 and IC8, which represent an »ideal rectifier«
together with the diodes D27, the capacitor C30 feedback resistor R30.
The rectified voltage IP_PAT is lead via the control board to the processor and, after further amplification
in the operation amplifier IC8, is also lead as voltage IP_PAT A for adjustment at the trim potentiometer
TP6 also to the processor.
The output voltage of the transformer UE1, on the other hand, moves after a restriction through the diodes
D16, D17 to the comparator IC3, the open collector of which operates at the resistor R23. There the zero
crossings of the HF current are detected, together with the second part of the comparator IC3, at the output
of which a signal according to the zero crossing of the HF voltage is present. Using the common load
resistor R23, this circuit represents a “WIRED OR”. There is a digital signal at the output the pulse length
of which corresponds to the phase relationship between voltage and current of the HF signal.
The voltage monitor for the patient circuit
Parallel to the lines which lead to the active electrode AE and the neutral electrode NE, the high-frequency
voltage is picked up and led via the capacitor C1 to the transformer UE2, which transforms the voltage by
a factor of 12.5 weakened to the secondary winding.
After a further halving of the measurement voltage in the resistor divider R15, R16, it moves, similar to the
situation in a current monitor, to an active, ideal rectifier, consisting of the operation amplifiers IC4, IC8 as
well as the diode D23, the capacitor C33 and the negative feedback resistor R52. The parameter for the
high-frequency patient voltage UP_HF is then led to the processor via the control board, as is also the
amplified signal UP_HF A.
At the same time, the output voltage of the transformer UE2 is directed to the comparator IC3 which emits
a digital signal to the “WIRED OR” during its positive phase. (See above for description).
158 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Senso-board
Slot J7
Phase monitor for the patient circuit
The phase monitor determines the phase angle between the voltage and current in a high-frequency patient
circuit. In this way not only the apparent power, but also the active power emitted to the patient can be
calculated.
As already described in the current monitor and voltage monitor sections, the zero crossings of the voltage
and current characteristics are evaluated in the comparators of the open collector operation amplifier IC3
and summarized as “WIRED OR” in the load resistor R23. There is therefore a digital signal at the output
7 of the IC3, the pulse length of which corresponds to the phase relationship between the current and
voltage.
This signal is smoothed using the diodes D20 and D21, the resistor R40 and the capacitor C13 (averaging),
then amplified and decoupled via the operation amplifier IC9.
The voltage U_PHASE corresponding to the phase between the HF current and HF voltage is directed to
the control board and can be adjusted there using the trim potentiometer TP 7. The result is fed to the
processor.
The spark monitor for monitoring the spark cycle at the electrodes
During the cutting process, for example, there is sparking at the active electrode. To maintain a consistant
quality for the cut, the spark must be recorded and controlled in its intensity.
Our generators produce sine-wave output voltages with a very low distortion factor. If a spark occurs in a
patient circuit, harmonic frequencies of the output signal are thus produced by the nonlinear characteristic
of the spark channel. Harmonics can be either harmonics or DC voltage. This is why one can also say
“rectifier effect of the spark”.
The DC voltage resulting in this way moves from the patient circuit to the spark monitor of the ICC. It
moves via the resistors R1, R2, R4 and R5 to the Z-diodes D1 and D2, switched antiserially, which limit the
signal to 15 volts. Then follows the operation amplifier IC2, switched as an isolation amplifier, which
makes the DC voltage signal durable.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The DC voltage proportional to the spark intensity in the patient circuit must now be evaluated by the unit
and fed isolated to the unit circuit. The remainder of the circuit is in principle an isolation amplifier: DC
voltage signal is chopped, fed isolated via a transformer to the unit circuit and then rectified again.
The oscillator module IC1 produces a square-wave signal with a pulse duty factor of 1:1, present at outputs
10 and 11 of the IC1. This is the chopper frequency which actuates the transistor T1 and T2 in push-pull
operation. This push-pull amplifier functions on the output transformer UE5, which is operated via the
isolation amplifier IC1 using the spark voltage as the operating voltage.
In this way, the spark voltage is chopped from the transistors T1,T2 and fed via the transformer UE5 as an
isolation at the secondary side to the unit circuit as AC voltage.
Diode D15 then follows on the secondary side, which again rectifies the alternating signal thus resulting
and smoothes this by means of the capacitor C22.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
159 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
In this way there is another DC voltage, proportional to the spark intensity, which is reduced via the resistor
divider R32, R33 and then fed to the isolation amplifier IC9. The output signal U_FUNKE moves from
there via the control board to control the processor.
The electronic components of this isolation amplifier within the patient circuit require an isolated voltage
supply to function. For this, a DC/DC converter is used which consists of a Colpitts oscillator (circuit
around Transistor T6), the alternating signal of which is transferred from the transformer UE6 to the secondary
side and rectified by diodes D4 and D6. The DC voltages thus resulting are limited to 9.1 volts by the Zdiodes D3 and D5 respectively.
In this way, voltages of +9.1 volts and –9,1 volts are available to the electronic circuit within the patient
circuit which is identified with I+9 and I–9.
Safety system for the neutral electrode (NESSY)
Problem description: The line for the neutral electrode must be monitored for wire break according to the
standard since there is risk of topical burns for the patient with an incorrect supply line.
In the ICC, correct application of the neutral electrode on the patient is also checked, as well as the uniform
distribution of the HF current to the two electrode surfaces (symmetry).
To monitor the connecting line, the cable is designed as a two-wire connection, the loop resistance of which
is measured. If the resistance value determined in this way is below a specific limit value, one can assume
that the neutral electrode line has no wire break. With conventional single-surface neutral electrodes,
monitoring is performed in this way.
However, such monitoring cannot determine whether the neutral electrode is actually applied to the patient
or whether it is lying around somewhere else.
To also check the correct application to the patient, the contacts of the neutral electrode must be divided,
whereby a control current must flow over the electrode halves and the patient. This control current permits
resistance measurement of the tissue impedance of the patient and thus information as to whether
•
the electrode is not connected or has a wire break (impedance > 120 ohms),
•
is lying directly on the operating table (impedance < 5 ohms),
•
or, most probably, is correctly applied to the patient (impedance between 5 and 120 ohms).
If the high-frequency current is not flowing regularly over both surfaces of a divided neutral electrode, this
can lead to burns due to current concentration under the electrode. It is therefore also necessary to check the
symmetrical current distribution on both halves of the electrode.
The NESSY system, a neutral electrode safety system patented by ERBE, takes care of all the tasks
mentioned.
Principle of the NESSY measurement system
The electric resistance of the neutral electrode is measured via an oscillator, the amplitude of which is
dampened by the resistance from the patient and measured by the system. With a correct circuit design, a
sufficiently precise resistance measurement is possible in this way.
160 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Senso-board
Slot J7
The symmetry of HF current on the halves of the neutral electrode is measured by a symmetrical transformer,
the output voltage of which is a function of current symmetry.
Implementation: The circuitry is found on the Senso-board. The oscillator is designed as a frequencyselective feedback amplifier: The amplifier IC6 actuates the push-pull stage, consisting of the transistors T4
and T5, and passes the amplified output signal to the frequency-selective serial circuit made of capacitor
C20, coil L1 and the inductivity from the primary side of transformer UE4.
One part of the output signal at the transformer UE4 is picked up via the resistor R18 and fed to the active
bandpass from the operation amplifier IC5 and its wiring. The center frequency is equal to the resonance
frequency of the previously mentioned serial circuit.
One part of the output signal from the active bandpass is fed again in proper phase to the amplifier IC6,
such that the entire arrangement fulfills the oscillation condition and oscillates at the resonance frequency
as an oscillator.
The oscillator can be switched off via the transistors T7 and T8 by means of the disable signal OSZI_DIS
from the processor.
The resistance of the neutral electrode is determined by loading this oscillator with the resistance to be
measured. The voltage collapses on the internal impedance of the oscillator according to the load. Thus
every oscillator voltage can be assigned an appropriate resistance value.
The oscillator voltage is present at the input of the active bandpass and can be picked up at the output of the
operation amplifier IC6.
After peak rectification by diode D30 and capacitor C34, the measurement voltage U_NESSY can be
picked up at the isolation amplifier IC9 and moves via the adjustment on the control board (trim potentiometer
TP9 ) to the processor to determine the resistance of the neutral electrode.
The high-frequency output voltage for the neutral electrode is balanced by the capacitors C2 and C3 on
both lines to the neutral electrode, i.e. divided equally.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Whether the current on both lines to the neutral electrode is now of equal size, depends on whether the two
electrode halves of the split neutral electrode are applied with the same surfaces to the patient. By measuring
the symmetry of the current and the resistance, it is therefore possible to receive information as to whether
the electrode is applied well to the patient with this entire surface.
The high-frequency current flows via the two primary windings 1 and 2 of the transformer UE3 in such a
manner that the resulting magnetic flow is cancelled out by equally strong currents. Thus in this case, no
voltage is induced at winding 3 of the transformer UE3. The reverse is true: The more unsymmetrical the
current flow is, the greater the voltage induced in winding 3.
The high-frequency output voltage, which is a measure for the unsymmetry of the current flow, is rectified
using diode D9 and filtered with capacitor C57, then amplified using the operation amplifier IC9, so that a
signal U_SYM is available which moves via the control board to the processor for evaluation.
The current density is calculated mathematically from the following dimensions, now known:
•
High-frequency current,
•
Symmetry of the high-frequency current at the neutral electrode,
•
Contact resistance of the neutral electrode to the body of the patient.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
161 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
The relay control
The relays REL1, REL2 and REL3 are used to switch on the required output sockets. The relays are controlled
by the control bus via the target memory D-flipflops IC10 and the transistors T9, T10 and T11.
162 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Relay board
Slot J8 (for ICC 300, 350)
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Fingerswitch monitor 1
•
Fingerswitch monitor 2
•
Relays and their actuation for optional, separate connection of high-frequency to the required output
sockets.
The fingerswitch monitors are used to activate the surgical unit from the surgeon's handle. The monitor can
detect which output sockets carry high frequency and which current quality (cutting or coagulating) should
be switched on.
Since the handles are within the patient current circuit electrically, the monitor circuits must be designed
isolated from the unit circuit and from the chassis.
The monitor circuits must therefore be supplied with current from a floating voltage source. These voltage
sources must however also be well isolated at high frequencies, such as are used in high-frequency surgery.
This means that monitors with their voltage sources must be designed as low capacity compared to the rest
of the unit.
The voltage supply for the monitors is realized by two push-pull converters.
The voltage converter for monitor 1 essentially consists of the transistors T1, T2 and the transformer UE 1.
The voltage converter for monitor 2 essentially consists of the transistors T5, T6 and the transformer UE 2.
The transistors of this converter are monitored via the oscillator IC 6, which supplies a symmetrical, squarewave signal, that is shortened in the monoflop IC5, in such a way that it is ensured that the two transistors
of a converter are not switched on at the same time.
The NAND circuits of the IC 4 create an appropriate push-pull signal that is directly suitable for actuation
of the converter transistors.
Since both fingerswitch monitors have identical circuits, the circuitry of only one of the two monitors is
explained in the following:
On the secondary side of the converter transformer UE 1, a needle-shaped output signal forms in the midfrequency range which is directed both to the diode bridge D1 to D5 with the transmitter diode from IC 1 as
well as via the RC low-pass C3, R2, C1, R1 on the handle's selection keys.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Due to the bridge circuit for diodes D1 to D5, the transmitter diode for optocoupler IC 1 may be illuminated
during both half-waves and connect through the receiving transistor for the optocoupler IC 1 by pulses.
If, on the other hand, a key on the handle is pressed, a voltage needle for the converter voltage is dampened
by the Si diode integrated into the handle, so that the transmitter diode for the coupler IC1 can no longer be
illuminated for the affected voltage needle and the appropriate transistor is no longer connected through at
exactly this voltage needle.
The output signal from the receiving transistor is directed to the two data inputs for the D-flipflops of the
IC3. These two D-flipflops additionally receive the actuation signals for the converter transistors, so that a
definite assignment is possible here between the dampened voltage needle and the actuation signal. The
two D-flipflops therefore function as a scanning circuit in proper phase, the output signal of which can be
assigned to the switched key in the handle.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
163 / 266
Relay board
Slot J8 (for ICC 300, 350)
Since a diode is switched in series for each of the two pushbuttons on the handle, although both diodes have
a definite and opposite polarity, this circuitry can be detected exactly via the dampened half-wave after
pressing a pushbutton, as to whether and which button was activated. Outputs 2 or 12 on the IC3 therefore
provide reliable information as to whether the “cutting ” or “coagulating” key was pressed. The information
that no key was pressed is just as possible as the information that both keys were pressed simultaneously.
Isolation of the fingerswitch monitor is complete via the transformer UE1 and via the optocoupler IC1.
The function of the second fingerswitch monitor is equivalent.
The two relays REL 1 and REL 2 are also found on the same PCB which safely separate the two output
sockets for the active electrodes from the generator circuit when the unit is not activated, while connecting
only the activated output socket to the generator when the unit is activated.
Due to the higher electrical strength that can be achieved, two relay contacts are switched in series.
The two relays are activated from the CPU via the target memory D-flipflops IC8 and the transistors T3,
T4.
164 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Display board
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
7-segment displays and their actuation
•
Keyboard and LED matrix for light fields
•
Operating board bus and keyboard treatment
•
Target memory and driver for rows and columns of the display matrix
•
Jumpers for activation of special software
7-segment displays and their actuation
All settings on the ICC are, insofar as this concerns numerical values, shown on the display board with 7segment displays.
The data to be displayed come from the operating board bus system B1BUS via the target memory (8-fold
D-flipflops) IC5 and IC7 on the segment driver IC6. This results in the bus for the segment actuation
identified as S1BUS.
The segment bus S1BUS controls the series resistors necessary for current limitation in the LEDs the
segments A to F and decimal point DP for the displays LED1 and LED2.
The columns are selected by the target memory IC5 via column driver transistors, which are depicted in the
circuit diagram each directly over the 7-segment displays.
In this way, every individual segment within the matrix is addressable via the column selection and the
segment control.
Keyboard and LED matrix for light fields
All keys for entering operating parameters are designed as membrane buttons and switched electrically in
the form of a matrix with columns and rows.
In addition, all visual displays with the exception of numerical displays are designed in the form of LED
displays or LED fields which are electrically switched as a matrix.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Operating board bus and keyboard treatment
To control the operating and display board, an independent bus system is required that is derived from the
address bus (A0 to A7). To do this, the addresses A0 to A7 are inverted in the transistor array IC12 and
through the transistor T21 and forming the operating board bus B1BUS, which now addresses the target
memory of the display board in conjunction with the corresponding independent chipselect signal from the
inverter IC8 and the required assemblies.
The rows of the keyboard are multiplexed via the target memory IC1; this produces the row actuation
pulses TZ1 to TZ4 (keyboard row).
If a specific key is now activated, this sends its answer during its activation time via the row actuation pulse
as an output signal via a line for the keyboard columns TS2 to TS3 to the keyboard encoder IC11, which
forms a 4 bit binary number from this and directs it via its output to the CPU for evaluation.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
165 / 266
Display board
Target memory and drivers for rows and columns of the display matrix
The LED matrix is actuated by the already described internal bus system B1BUS of the display board.
The 8-fold D-flipflops IC2, IC3 and IC12 are used as target memories for columns (IC2) and rows (IC3).
The columns of the lamp matrix LS1 to LS6 are activated via the driver transistors T2, T20, T11, T10, T4
and T9 switched as emitter followers in a multiplex method and each switched for a brief time to +5 volts.
The current is then led via the appropriate LED and directed via the necessary current limitation resistors as
well as the transistor array IC4 to chassis.
The blue LEDs D36 and D37 for display of the coagulation channels are an exception, the anodes of which
are permanently at +5 volts via the current limitation resistors and are switched on via the transistor array
IC13.
Jumpers for activation of special software
Jumpers J3 to J10 are intended for software specialities available for tests and for switching on special
features in certain countries. The corresponding jumpers are already placed during production and must not
be changed arbitrarily.
166 / 266
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Upper wiring module
The “upper wiring module” PCB directs the rectified supply voltage from the motherboard via the plug J14
as a supply voltage to the QC power stage. In addition, this PCB is used as a connection between the QC
power stage and the power module, since currents of this dimension cannot be directed via the motherboard.
The lines between the QC power stage and the motherboard are directed through a ferrite core to reduce
interferences from the QC power stage into the network.
CAUTION
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
This PCB is at supply voltage potential
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
167 / 266
Chapter 4
Block diagrams
ICC 200
Block diagram
V 2.0 / V 4.0
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Ers. durch = Repl. by
4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
171 / 266
ICC 300
V 2.0 / V 4.0
Block diagram
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Ers. durch = Repl. by
172 / 266
4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
ICC 350
V 2.0 / V 4.0
Block diagram
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Ers. durch = Repl. by
4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
173 / 266
Chapter 5
Circuit diagrams
PCBs for
ICC 200, 300, 350
OUT
SG531P
EN
G
IC16
C1
Vcc
+5V
68nF
C4
OSC
PF1
VCC
VBAT
IC10
68nF
VNOT
BAT ON
RES
RES
PFD
WD0
WD1
CE IN
GND
68nF
C5
C11
13
11
14
10
16
15
5
2
68nF
C6
5
GND
Vcc
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
2
1
Vcc
+5V
VNOT
3
74HC00
&
6
5
GND
IC11
74HC74
S
C
D
R
IC13
CE OUT 12
LOW LINE 6
8
OSC SEL
GND 4
MAX691
7
9
1
3
Vcc
+5V
R12
D2
68nF
C3
GND
1
R3
R4
R21
Vcc
+5V
220R
&
74HC00
10
9
8
13
12
11
R6
IC13
8
9
&
11
74HC00
13
12
Vcc
+5V
CE_IN
Vcc
+5V IC15
74HC74
S
C
D
R
Vcc
+5V
CLK
WDI
RES
RES
CE_OUT
10
Vcc
+5V IC15
GND
10nF
C15
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
68nF
C7
1N4148
5k6
R11
68nF
C8
5k6
R10
68nF
C9
5k6
68nF
C10
5k6
R13
+24V
8k2
1k
GND
+
2k2
3V
5k6
68nF
C2
GND
68nF
R20
178 / 266
M1
CLK
RES
INT
5k6
R5
WAIT
5k6
R14
WR
RD
IORQ
MREQ
RES
220R
Vcc
+5V
IC1
Nr.
CLK
11
10
R
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
nderung
3
2
1
15
14
12
13
6
4
5
7
9
Z84C00
74HC4020
CLK
IC12
SIO-CLK
PIC-CLK
6
26 RESET
Vcc
+5V 25
BUSREQ
23 BUSACK
16 INT
17 NMI
24 WAIT
18 HALT
28 RFSH
21 RD
22 WR
19 MREQ
20 IORQ
27 M1
Datum
220R
3
A15
Name
GND
5
4
6
3
2
1
5
4
&
&
DMUX
0
7
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
27
22
26
20
19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11
Name
74HC138
G
Datum
2
0
0
7
DMUX
CE1
CE2
OE
R/W
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
74HC138
G
IC9
2
0
IC8
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
5864
N.C.
VCC
IC2
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
WR
Blatt
1 von 3
LP bs.: 30128-052
LP un.: 40128-026
Gepr ft
Vcc
+5V
2
1
5
4
CS11
CS10
CS9
CS8
CS7
CS6
CS5
CS4
CE_OUT
JP1
VNOT
&
3
74HC00
&
IC15
5
4
27C512
A0
A1
A3
A2
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
IC3
CE_IN
74HC00
6
1
27
26
2
23
21
24
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IC11
A0-A15
A13
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
D0-D7
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
B
M1
A5
A4
A3
GND
6
2
A14
Vcc
+5V
1
2
23
21
24
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
28
1
A13
A0-A15
A14
J2/7C
IORQ
D0-D7
A0-A15
MREQ
13
10
9
7
8
12
15
14
5
4
3
2
1
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
R19
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
VNOT
20
19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11
6
D0-D7
30128-052
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
CPU
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
74HC00
&
IC15
CE
OE 22
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DBUS
ABUS
ICC 200, 300, 350
CPU PCB
30128-052
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
BT1
R1
ABUS
DBUS
CS8
WAIT
RD
IEI_5
INT
CLK
RD
IORQ
21
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
D
IC14
15
RD
RDY
16
CS
AD7824
10
22
A1
20
19
18
17
9
8
7
6
A0
D0-D7
CLK
RD
INT
IEI
22
IEO
24
23
25
35
A
3
VREF-
13
VREF+ 14
AIN4 1
AIN3 2
AIN2
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
GND
Vcc
+5V
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
AIN1 4
Z80PIO
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
4
5
A1
CS4
6
A0
ARDY 18
ASTB 16
7
8
9
10
J2/6C
WDI
J2/7C
MC-FREI
J1/8
J1/9
J1/10
J1/11
J1/19
J1/18
J1/17
J1/16
J1/15
J1/14
C16
12
J1/13
GND
180nF
C17
M1_PIO
Vcc
+5V
J1/12
GND
CS5
A1
A0
IEI_6
IEI_5
INT
CLK
RD
IORQ
M1_PIO
180nF
C18
13
GND
180nF
C19
14
GND
CLK
RD
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
23
25
35
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
4
5
6
1k
1k
R15
1k
R16
1k
R17
R18
Z80PIO
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
1
20
5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
4
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
1nF
RN1
1
3
20
GND
8
IC5
J2/9A
J2/6A
J2/7A
J2/8A
Nr.
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
nderung
J2/8C
J1/21
J1/22
PIC-RTCC
J1/24
J1/25
J1/26
IEI_7
IEI_6
INT
CLK
RD
IORQ
M1_PIO
CS6
Datum
CLK
RD
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
23
25
35
Name
Vcc
+5V
Z80PIO
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
4
5
1
20
6
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
IC6
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
19
A1
J1/27
J1/35
J1/34
J1/33
J1/32
J1/31
J1/30
J1/29
D0-D7
A0
18
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
J1/28
27
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
15
ARDY
ASTB 16
6
19
8*1k
D0-D7
C20
15
GND
+
18
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
ARDY
ASTB 16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
15
Datum
D1
Name
1N4148
FISCH-B3
FUSS-A2
FISCH-B2
FUSS-B1
FISCH-A2
FUSS-A1
J2/13C
FUSS-B2
FISCH-A3
FISCH-A1
J2/18C
FISCH-B1
J2/19C
SICHER
J2/20C
Blatt 2 von 3
LP bs.: 30128-052
LP un.: 40128-026
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
B
GND
68nF
C14
IC4
R9
19
2
15uF
D0-D7
9
GND
+
R7
M1
CLK
RD
&
IC11
8
Z80PIO
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
&
IC11
11
74HC00
13
12
30128-052
M1_PIO
J2/27C
J2/26A
J2/26C
J2/25A
J2/25C
J2/24A
J2/24C
J2/23A
J2/27A
J2/28C
J2/28A
J2/29C
J2/29A
J2/30C
J2/30A
J2/31C
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
CPU
18
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Benennung/Title
ICC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
ARDY
ASTB 16
Vcc
+5V
Gert/UNIT
74HC00
10
9
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
23
25
35
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
IEI_7
INT
CLK
RD
IORQ
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
4
5
1
20
6
CS7
IC7
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
19
A1
RES
D0-D7
A0
M1_PIO
680k
ABUS
1
22k
DBUS
R8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
5M6
C13
5
15uF
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
CPU PCB
30128-052
179 / 266
7
RES
J1/35
J1/34
J1/33
J1/32
J1/31
J1/30
J1/29
J1/28
J1/27
J1/26
J1/25
J1/24
J1/22
J1/21
J1/19
J1/18
J1/17
J1/16
J1/15
J1/14
J1/13
J1/12
J1/11
J1/10
J1/9
R24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RA1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
RA2
8*2k2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RA3
8*2k2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8*2k2
2k2
2k2
R22
J1-40
J1-35
J1-34
J1-33
J1-32
J1-31
J1-30
J1-29
J1-28
J1-27
J1-26
J1-25
J1-24
J1-22
J1-21
J1-19
J1-18
J1-17
J1-16
J1-15
J1-14
J1-13
J1-12
J1-11
J1-10
J1-9
J1-8
Vcc
+5V
C12
PIC-CLK
2k2
R2
SICHER
FUSS-B2
GND
RES
PIC-RTCC
Vcc
+5V
FISCH-B1
MC-FREI
GND
68nF
2k2
R23
IC17
RA3
RA2
4
3
6
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
RB7
RB6
RB5
RB4
RB3
RB2
RB1
Nr.
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
12
9
RB0
8
10
7
6
5
2
4
J1
3
1
PIC16C54
MCLR
RTCC
15 OSC2
16 OSC1
2
1
17 RA0
18 RA1
F-GND
J1-35
J1-33
J1-31
J1-29
J1-27
J1-25
J1-21
J1-19
J1-17
J1-15
J1-13
J1-11
J1-9
F-GND
2k2
R26
Vcc
+5V
nderung
FISCH-A3
FUSS-A2
FUSS-B1
FUSS-A1
FISCH-A2
FISCH-B2
FISCH-B3
FISCH-A1
J1-40
F-GND
J1-34
J1-32
J1-30
J1-28
J1-26
J1-24
J1-22
J1-18
J1-16
J1-14
J1-12
J1-10
J1-8
2k2
R25
Datum
Name
+24V J2/31C
J2/30C
J2/29C
J2/28C
J2/27C
J2/26C
J2/25C
J2/24C
SICHER
J2/20C
J2/19C
J2/18C
FISCH-A3
FISCH-B3
FISCH-B2
FISCH-A2
J2/13C
J2/8C
J2/7C
J2/6C
Vcc
+5V
5
A23
A24
C23
C24
C32
Datum
A32
A31
A30
C30
C31
A29
A28
A27
A26
C29
C28
C27
C26
Name
RES
J2/30A
J2/29A
J2/28A
J2/27A
J2/26A
J2/25A
J2/24A
J2/23A
FISCH-B1
FISCH-A1
FUSS-B2
FUSS-A2
FUSS-B1
FUSS-A1
J2/9A
J2/8A
J2/7A
J2/6A
GND
Blatt 3 von 3
LP bs.: 30128-052
LP un.: 40128-026
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
B
A22
A25
A21
C22
C25
A20
C21
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
C20
C19
C18
C17
C16
C15
C14
C13
C12
C11
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
J2
MREQ
INT
DBUS
RES
ABUS
CS10
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Vcc
+5V
180 / 266
34
36
38
31
33
35
37
D0
40
IORQ
CS11
SIO-CLK
DBUS
GND
D1
D7
D6
D3
A14
ABUS
30128-052
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
CPU
A1
A3
WR
M1_PIO
CS9
RD
A12
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
GND
32
29
D2
39
28
27
D5
30
26
24
22
20
18
16
A15 23
D4 25
17
A11 19
A13 21
A0
15
A2
14
13
A4
A5
A7
12
8
10
6
11
4
5
A6
A9
2
3
J3
1
A10 7
A8 9
VNOT
+5V
Vcc
J1/8
ICC 200, 300, 350
CPU PCB
30128-052
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
ICC 200, 300, 350
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
CPU PCB (bare)
40128-026
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
181 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
U_IN
GND
+
R33
EN_5V
GND
GND
$plname
$plname
GND
+
GND
ec50r25
GND
ec380_17
1000uF
R34
30k
10k
C51
2u2
ec380_17
+
1000uF
R26
$plname
ec50r25
30k
+
GND
$plname
2
8
4
GND
+
GND
BC557
T2
3
1
GND
GND
8
4
14
GND
SOFT
VREF RD
PFAIL
C34
11
GND
GND
GND
$rpname
GND
$plname
GND
GND
FCOMP
GND
RESOUT
GND
OUT
R OSC C
L4972
GND
FCOMP
GND
SOFT
VREF RD
GND
$plname
$rpname
GND
PFAIL
10
BOOTS
FEEDB
17
18
L4972
$plname
22nF
C40
$plname
RESOUT
IC6
INP SYNCIN
VSTART
5
6
C39
7
$plname
22k
R28
R25
$plname
10k
C36
2u2
C37
ec50r25
2u2
C35
+
+
ec50r25
2u2
C38
15
11
16
$plname
330pF
R27
10
$plname
36k
3
IC1
INP SYNCIN
VSTART
C49
7
$plname
14
R42
$plname
13
ec50r25
2u2
2
+
+
15
C54
$plname
22nF
3
1
2n2
GND
GND
OUT
GND
R OSC C
D2
U_IN
BOOTS
FEEDB
20
1
9
17
C55
U_IN
C32
C47
D7
$plname
5V6
100R
C52
ec50r25
2u2
C50
13
ec50r25
2u2
2
+
ec50r25
2u2
5
6
C53
16
$plname
330pF
R35
22k
R36
$plname
36k
18
$plname
$plname
SB340
C41
R29
2n2
C42
GND
20
9
C17
$plname
470R
100nF
1nF
$plname
$plname
GND
D3
GND
$plname
UE1
SB340
C56
11
C57
5
Nr.
GND
GND
100nF
1nF
$plname
$plname
2
ec380_17
+
1000uF
LED4
GND
R14
$plname
470R
1
R49
$plname
$plname
rot
5k6
C12
$plname
8
2n2
R17
GND
14
OSC
INP
$plname
4k3
R12
$plname
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Datum
EN_5V
15
OUT 2
SOFT
12 13
GND
5
GND
15k
C13
$plname
22nF
10
2u2
FEEDB
C14
$plname
$plname
4k7
$rpname
$plname
9k1
C43
+
ec50r25
GND
L4962
$plname
4k7
c100
1uF
C46
Name
D1
+
GND
GND
GND
ec130r50
100uF
C45
$plname
Blatt
1 von 2
2k2
R23
18k
$plname
$plname
1.0
40121-060
LP bs.: 30128-410
GND
Vcc
+5V
GND
$plname
$plname
rot
R22
Vdd
+15V
C28
MP4
GND
$plname
D6
$plname
2n2
MUR120
C67
GND
$plname
220R
R50
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
c100
1uF
C29
+
ec130r50
100uF
C30
GND
+
ec130r50
100uF
C31
+
ec130r50
100uF
2
GND
3
30128-410
3k3
O
Kleinsp.-Netzteil
GND
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
G
to220l
-15V
79xx
$plname
$plname
rot
C62
+
$plname
1uF
LED1
-15V
Vee
GND
Kleinsp.Netzteil
I
IC10
D5
1N4148
Benennung/Title
R15
LED6
$plname
1
GND
ICC
100nF
+24V
Gert/UNIT
GND
GND
$plname
0.7
ec130r50
220uF
C64
GND
C63
+
GND
U_NEG
40121-060
20-07-94
J.Beller
LP un.:
Gepr ft
R20
LED2
470R
GND
Name
GND
GND
100uH
$plname
8
M.Fritz
$plname
1nF
5
R18
LED3
$plname
$plname
rot
4k7
L1B
Gezeich. 20-07-94
GND
0.7
GND
$plname
100R
+
100uF
L1
13-09-95Datum
A
SB340
C26
L1A
GND
+
0.7
ec130r50
100uF
C44
ec130r50
IC3
F.COMP
$plname
$plname
+
+
100uF
11
nderung
200uH
L3
$plname
5
8
$plname
30121-037
R48
R31
7
GND
2
U_NEG
R30
R44
R38
1k
4k7
C58
c100
1uF
C59
ec130r50
100uF
C60
R13
+
ec130r50
100uF
C61
ec130r50
182 / 266
R19
2k2
rot
$plname
$plname
0.7
Low Voltage Supply
30128-410
ICC 200, 300, 350
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
ALARM
TON3
TON2
TON1
CS-TON
RESET
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
ALARM
TON3
TON2
TON1
CS-TON
RESET
GND
68nF
10k
R3
10k
R2
C18
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
2
RN1
1D
1
R8
100k
40174
R
C1
8*10k
14
13
11
6
4
3
9
IC9
200k
TP4
1
R6
200k 100k
TP3
200k 100k
R4
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
15
12
10
7
5
2
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
NE555
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
NE555
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
IC7
GND
5
2
6
7
4
GND
5
2
6
7
4
IC5
NE555
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
IC4
GND
5
2
6
7
4
MP3
MP2
MP1
4066
9
5
1
1
1
TON-CPU
6
IC8
1
4066
3
IC8
1
13
IC8
1
4066
2
8
4
1
R5
10k
R24
10k
R9
10k
R7
10k
R10
5k1
R16
Nr.
100k
GND
4066
10
nderung
12
TP2
68nF
C65
Datum
2
3
Name
n.best
BS170
T1
1
R11
R37
10k
68nF
C66
C4
10nF
C3
C5
68nF
GND
+
Datum
6n8
C10
C11
20-07-94 J.Beller
M.Fritz
Name
GND
68nF
R39
Blatt 2 von 2
LP bs.: 30128-410
LP un.: 40121-060
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 20-07-94
A
GND
n.best
1uF
Vdd
+15V
R1
C2
C7
68nF
10nF
C6
C8
10nF
51k
TP1
2k2
C9
1
IC8
1
11
10nF
10nF
10nF
5k1
1
GND
3
U_IN
GND
GND
6
8
5
R21
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
2
+
TDA7052
IC2
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
C16
TON3
TON2
TON1
TON-CPU
RESET
CS-TON
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J2
J1
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
n.best
30128-410
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Kleinsp.Netzteil
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
D4
MUR120
+24V
GND
Vdd
+15V
ALARM
Vcc
+5V
Vee
-15V
+24V
GND
+
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
3u3
5
n.best
C1
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
Low Voltage Supply
30128-410
183 / 266
C18
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
ALARM
TON3
TON2
TON1
CS-TON
RESET
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
ALARM
TON3
TON2
TON1
CS-TON
RESET
GND
68nF
10k
R3
10k
R2
IC9
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
8*10k
1
15
14
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
12
13
2
10
11
RN1
7
40174
5
2
6
1D
4
3
R
9
C1
1
R8
200k 100k
TP4
200k 100k
R6
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
IC4
IC7
NE555
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
GND
7
NE555
RES
DCH
6
THD OUT 3
2
TRG
5
CV
4
GND
5
2
6
7
4
NE555
IC5
GND
6
7
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
2
TRG
5
CV
4
10nF
MP3
MP2
MP1
5
TON-CPU
6
IC8
1 1
4066
9
4066
3
IC8
1 1
13
IC8
1 1
4066
2
8
4
1
10k
R24
10k
R9
10k
R7
R10
5k1
R5
10k
R16
Nr.
100k
GND
4066
10
nderung
12
R4
200k 100k
TP3
68nF
C65
Datum
2
3
Name
n.best
BS170
T1
1
R11
R37
TP2
C2
+
GND
Datum
6n8
C10
Name
GND
68nF
R39
C11
Blatt 2 von 2
LP bs.: 30128-410
LP un.: 40121-060
Gepr ft 20-07-94 J.Beller
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
A
GND
n.best
1uF
10k
68nF
C66
C4
10nF
10nF
51k
TP1
2k2
C9
1
IC8
1
11
10nF
C6
C8
C3
C5
C7
68nF
5
68nF
5k1
1
GND
3
U_IN
GND
GND
6
8
R21
Diese Zeichnung ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt, daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
2
+
TDA7052 5
IC2
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
GND
C16
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J2
J1
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
n.best
30128-410
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Kleinsp.Netzteil
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
D4
MUR120
+24V
TON-CPU
RESET
CS-TON
RESERVE
TIMEROFF
ALARM
TON3
TON2
TON1
Vee
-15V Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
+24V
GND
+
10nF
10nF
3u3
184 / 266
n.best
Vdd
+15V
R1
ICC 200, 300, 350
Low Voltage Supply (bare)
40121-060
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
C1
R57
11
68nF
C12
10k
68nF
Vee
-15V
6 C11
-
IC9
LM319
+
R56
6 C8
-
IC4
LM319
68nF
Vee
-15V
GND
C9
68nF
11
GND
+
D10
+
IC9
LM319
-
1N4148
GND
9
10
Vdd
+15V
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
+
11
68nF
C18
GND
-
6 C17
68nF
Vee
-15V
GND
+
7
12
IC14
LM319
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
GND
8
GND
GND
3
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
GND
9
10
Vdd
+15V
+
2
1
3
4
5
R88
NT_EIN
U_PRIM
GND
7
Vdd
+15V
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
&
IC13
8
GND
HF_EIN
IC4
LM319
-
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
9
10
Vdd
+15V
100pF
U_INP
R52
Vdd
+15V
1N4148
GND
1k
1k
D11
R51
D12
R53
7k5
820R
R59
10R
4k7
180R
IC9
LM319
2n2
R50
4
C10
R60
R61
-
10k
560R
1k
R58
R69
R68
R49
R48
9k1
C16
2k2
560R
2n2
5
R54
3
1
2
9
12
8
6
4
5
IPB
7
6
RCX
CX
G
+
IC14
LM319
-
GND
7
GND
GND
8
GND
11
Q
Vdd
+15V
4
5
GND
+
IC14
LM319
-
13
10
Q
OSC OUT
4047
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
IC18
D16
33k
D14
Vdd
+15V
12
Vdd
+15V
GND
3
GND
GND
S0
S1
4539
IB0
11
IB1
12
IB2
13
IB3
10
2
14
4
5
IA0
IA1
IA2
3
IA3
6
IC11
15
EB
EA
1
GND
GND
2
Nr.
nderung
B 3371 R12=10R
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
GND
1k
D17
Vdd
+15V
1N4148
D15
3V6
D13
1
3
Vdd
+15V
OB 9
OA 7
R78
8k2
C28
R74
R75
4k7
R72
10k
10k
R70
1N4148
3V6
R71
4k7
100R
+15V
Vdd
1N4148
Vdd
+15V
R76
Datum
11-94
30-1-96
GND
T4
BS170
1k
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
Name
Fritz
Fritz
2
1
3
4
5
2
1
3
4
5
&
Datum
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
&
IC16
4528
Blatt
Hagg
Fritz
Name
2
1
2
1
3
3
GND
68nF
C30
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
68nF
14
15
13
12
11
14
15
13
12
11
14
15
13
&
&
&
12
13
9
10
9
10
9
10
MP2
30128-357
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
CONTROL-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC16
4528
4013
S
C
D
R
IC21
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC17
GND
10
9
11
8
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
GND IC13
12
11
+15V
C20
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
7
6
7
6
4030
=1
IC12
40128-095
30128-357
28-11-94
1 von
LP bs.:
LP un.:
Gepr ft
100pF
GND
4013
S
C
D
R
IC21
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC17
GND
4
5
3
6
C15
Gezeich. 15.02.94
C
GND
EIN_AUS
R67
1k
TP13
R65
MP1
1k
C19
R73
220pF
R77
5k
R81
5k6
C31
TP15
C22
470R
33pF
100pF
43k
1k
R86
5k
R80
20k
C21
5k6
C32
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
TP14
C29
33pF
33pF
5
100pF
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
TSI
AUS
AN
B
A
ICC 200, 300, 350
Control board
30128-357
185 / 266
U_INT
U_NETZT
IP_PAT
UP_HF
U_PHASE
R26
3k3
5k6
R3
3k3
R6
3k3
R4
3k3
R11
10R
GND
GND
GND
GND
5k
GND
5k
330pF
GND
GND
GND
R10
10k
R7
10k
R5
10k
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
GND
GND
GND
5
GND
R25
68k
IC2
LM324
-
3 +
2
RESET
1
GND
GND
CS_DAC1
DAC_A1
ANALOG_2
ANALOG_1
ANALOG_3
CS_DAC2
IC1
TL084
5k
DAC_A0
1
7
14
15uF
-
3 +
2
2k
R22
IC1
TL084
-
5 +
6
2k
R23
IC1
TL084
-
2k
R36
GND
D0-D7
GND
D0-D7
LDAC
WR
CS
RES
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Vcc
+5V
AD7224
17
14
15
16
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
IC8
19
GND
5
4
21 20
C3 23
C2 24
C1 1
C0 2
Vdd
+15V
3
2n2
C7
Nr.
nderung
4
5
GND
GND
T1
BC547
+
Datum
Name
Fritz
Fritz
GND
4078
1
Datum
13
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
IPB
3
2 von
LP bs.:
Blatt
Hagg
Fritz
Name
40128-095
30128-357
28-11-94
Vdd
+15V
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 15.02.94
C
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
IC5
GND
3
R38
12
MP5
GND
2
R79
IC4
LM319
-
U_NETZT/2
U_INT_A
2
11-94
A
GND
4
C24
B 3371 R12=10R
D
1
2
1nF
30-1-96
MAX516
CS
WR
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
IC6
GND
A
VOUT
18
FUNKE_AUS
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
GND
3
D
5
Vdd
+15V
4k7
4
11
12 +
13
U_FUNKE/2
2k
U_FUNKE
GND
TP2
STEUERBUS
STEUERBUS
R47
R44
Vee
68nF
-15V
R55
1k
10k
GND
+
R12
TP3
TP4
TP1
1k
C6
TP8
TP7
5k
5k
n.best
C37
C38
R1
330pF
5k1
D7
D5
D6
1N4148
1N4148
1N4148
R35
R24
R21
D9
3u3
4k7
R43
rot
C1
+
REF
GND
GND
GND
&
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC10
GND
5
2
AD654
DGND
U
F
Fout
IC15
1k
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
CT
-
CT
RT
Vin
&
IC10
6
7
3
4
+
8
2
1
Vdd
+15V
R83
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
14
15
13
12
11
2
1
3
4
5
GND
68nF
C26
1nF
-
C36
2k
2k
1N4148
VCC
ANA0
ANA1
ANA2
ANA3
3
1
4k7
D1
R62
R66
R84
TP17
4k7
C13
3k9
C14
2k
C27
20k
2n2
2n2
R85
GND
10k
+
STE_EIN
IC1
TL084
1
3
Vdd
+15V
4
GND
12
11
10
9
5
4
3
2
4030
=1
4082
&
IC7
4082
&
IC7
12
13
IC12
TP16
10k
D18
1N4148
13
1
11
1k
C23
30128-357
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
9
8
MP3
GND
CONTROL-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
9
10
7
6
GND
=1
4030
T5
BS170
5
6
C25
IC12 68nF
Vdd
+15V
RESET
C3
SICHER
68nF
NT_EIN
R82
186 / 266
33pF
Vdd
+15V
EIN_AUS
TSI_STE
4030
=1
IC12
ICC 200, 300, 350
Control board
30128-357
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
TEMP
RES_ANA2
RES_ANA1
I_HFL
U_SYM
U_NESSY
IP_PAT_A
UP_HF_A
3k3
R19
3k3
R15
3k3
R18
3k3
R13
100R
R17
3k3
R9
3k3
R8
GND
GND
750R
TP5
TP6
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
n.best
4k7
180nF
GND
R29
IC2
LM324
-
GND
10 +
9
5 +
IC2
LM324
-
C35
6
6k8
R28
8
7
Vee
-15V
12k
GND
R31
Vdd
+15V
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
1
15
13
14
11
10
1k
R37
+24V
GND
R32
2k
IC2
LM324
-
12 +
13
Z
A0
A1
A2
A3
INH
IC3
GND
4067
GND
MUX_A3
MUX_A2
MUX_A1
MUX_A0
14
C2
U_INT_A
GND
1nF
Vcc
+5V
+
468nF
C5
11C4
BER_2
BER_1
2k
Nr.
nderung
6
11
13
14
D2
D3
D4
D5
4
6
11
13
14
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Datum
Name
Fritz
Fritz
500R
500R
TP12
TP11
40174
28-11-94
Hagg
Fritz
Name
U_NETZT
FUNKE_AUS
BER_2
BER_1
MUX_A3
MUX_A2
MUX_A1
MUX_A0
DAC_A1
DAC_A0
Blatt 3 von
LP un.:
3
40128-095
LP bs.: 30128-357
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 15.02.94
Datum
1N4148
68R
C
1N4148
D3
D2
15
12
10
7
5
2
15
12
10
7
5
2
100R
R46
R45
1D
R
C1
IC20
40174
R
C1
1D
ANALOG_4
3
D0
9
1
4
3
9
1
D1
D0
T2
BC547
11-94
1
T3
BC338
2
MP4
B 3371 R12=10R
2
Vdd
+15V
3
RESET
CS_DFF2
30-1-96
10k
R63
10k
R64
8
RESET
CS_DFF1
8V2
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
GND
GND
GND
R33
IC1
TL084
-
10 +
9
Vee
68nF
-15V
-
IC2
LM324
Vdd
+15V
R34
U_NETZT/2
1N4148
R27
10k
R30
2k
STEUERBUS
STEUERBUS
U_FUNKE/2
D4
5k
5k
5k
5k1
5k
R2
TP9
R14
4k7
R39
R40
TP10
R16
R20
10k
2k
R41
R42
3k3
3k3
10k
2k
3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
1
Vee
-15V
GND
0.6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Vcc
+5V
RN2
D0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
8x10k
RN1
30128-357
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
1
Vdd
+15V
U_NESSY
U_SYM
U_FUNKE
U_NETZT
U_INT
U_INP
AUS
AN
B
A
TSI
TEMP
STE_EIN
HF_EIN
NT_EIN
SICHER
ANALOG_4
ANALOG_3
ANALOG_2
CONTROL-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
R87
1
Vdd
+15V
B32
B31
A31
A32
B30
A30
B26
A26
B29
B25
A25
A29
B24
A24
B28
B23
A23
A28
B22
A22
B27
B21
A21
A27
B20
A20
B16
B19
A16
D6
B15
B18
A15
D5
B14
B17
A14
D4
B13
A19
A13
D3
B12
B11
A18
A12
D2
B10
A17
A11
D1
D7
A10
0.8
ANALOG_1
Vcc
+5V
B9
A9
D0
A7
Vdd
+15V
+24V
B8
B7
A6
A8
B5
Vee
-15V
0.6
B6
B4
B3
A3
A5
B2
A2
A4
B1
A1
J1
C34
GND
C33
3u3
+
3u3
MP6
+
8x10k
10k
Vdd
+15V
+24V
Vdd
+15V
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
STE_EIN
SICHER
HF_EIN
NT_EIN
CS_DFF2
CS_DFF1
CS_DAC2
CS_DAC1
RESET
U_PHASE
UP_HF_A
UP_HF
IP_PAT_A
IP_PAT
RES_ANA1
RES_ANA2
I_HFL
TSI_STE
U_PRIM
CS_DFF2
CS_DFF1
CS_DAC2
CS_DAC1
RESET
STEUERBUS
5
STEUERBUS
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
Control board
30128-357
187 / 266
D8
R89
ICC 200, 300, 350
Control board (bare)
40128-095
188 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
GND
9
8
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
C12
4081
&
IC4
+
10
Vdd
+15V
9
GND
13
12
1
3
GND
2
11
4
4081
&
IC4
6
A5
GND
8
A4
5
7
11V
D11
6
5
1
2
R7
A3
4
3
Vdd
+15V
4081
&
IC4
4081
&
IC4
2
100k
A2
GND
68nF
5
6
13
12
9
8
1
2
GND
3
100k
D12
R8
BC557
1N4148
T11
1
C7
1k
4011
&
IC1
4011
&
IC1
4011
&
IC1
4011
&
IC1
4
11
10
3
GND
1
1
15
12
10
6
4
2
2
4
6
15
10
Vdd
+15V
4049
14
4049
IC3
1
4049
IC3
1
IC3
4049
1
4049
IC3
1
4049
IC3
1
IC3
4049
1
4049
IC2
1
4049
IC2
1
IC2
4049
11
9
7
5
3
3
5
1
4049
IC2
14
7
1
4049
IC2
11
9
GND
IC2
12
+15V
GND
2
2
2
2
GND
Nr.
2
T6
VN10KM
GND
2
T10
VN10KM
GND
2
T7
VN10KM
GND
2
T3
VN10KM
GND
nderung
T5
VN10KM
GND
T9
VN10KM
GND
T8
VN10KM
GND
T4
VN10KM
R3
R5
A1
+
3
3
GND
Datum
D7
1N5346
Name
Datum
Name
40128-127
30128-528
1 von 1
Blatt
LP bs.:
LP un.:
Gepr ft
C2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
IRFP460
T2
IRFP460
T1
Gezeich. 11-12-95 M. Hagg
B
1N5346
MUR120
D5
D6
MUR120
30128-539
2
1
UE2
Vdd
+15V
GND
D8
MUR120
D10
D9
MUR120
30128-539
2
1
UE1
Vdd
+15V
R2
R1
J1
C10
2k2
C5
2k2
C4
+15V
1uF
MUR860
MUR860
C6
C11
D3
D4
68nF
68nF
3u3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
22nF
22nF
D1
D2
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
+
+
150R
150R
R4
R6
C8
150R
150R
C9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
3u3
MUR860
5
MUR860
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
C1
C3
30128-528
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
QC Power Stage
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
1uF
MP2
MP1
2
1
2
1
J3
J2
ICC 200, 300, 350
QC Power Stage
30128-528
189 / 266
1uF
u68
R9
8*10k
RN1
3u3
ICC 200, 300, 350
QC Power Stage (bare)
40128-127
190 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
TSI
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
J1
QKE2
J4
1
$plname
c430
U-NETZT
U-INT
U-INP
U-PRIM
TSI
TEMP
NTE
GND
1.0
9n5
Vdd
+15V
$wert
$plname
R17
GND
52uH
REL1
4
2
2
12
30121-073
$plname
1
3
$plname
UE3
GND
IC2
7667
IC2
7667
$plname
2
4
$rpname
C17
$rpname
$plname
$rpname
$plname
D5
L2
5
7
R13
1N4148
$plname
1k
R14
r150
GND
r150
C15
1k
Vdd
+15V
$wert
$plname
R18
GND
MUR860
d50b10skk
D4
MUR860
0.8
u68
c150
GND
ec150r
T2_TSI
Vdd
+15V
30k
$plname
R2
22uF
R4
ec150r
d50b10skk
C16
QKE1
$plname
REL1
U-INP
C4
C10
R11
+
$plname
22uF
R6
2k
47k
47k
$plname
+
$plname
U-INT
10
r200
R5
GND
$plname
$plname
GND-STE
c225_11
GND
GND
$rpname
Nr.
nderung
Datum
22-1-96
17-7-95
GND
C 3570 s.Anderungsmitt.
GND
$plname
D 3696 s.Anderungsmitt.
19-11-97
9V1
$plname
R12
BUZ74
GND
68nF
D1
$plname
10k
C3
1206
C6
T3
TEMP
NTC1
10k
$plname
R10
Vdd
+15V
0R47
R9
ec130r
9
10k
+
10uF
+
REL1
U-NETZT
1
r150
U-PRIM
Name
Fritz
Fritz
c225_11
c100
U-NT-STE
C12
2
1k
R15
+
$plname
NTE
0.47uF
330R
C14
C11
C18
D2
C13
10uF
1uF
BA159
$plname
C7
R7
1nF
R8
c380
$plname
68nF
C5
470k
200k
$plname
10nF
150pF
R3
IC1
7667
4
$rpname
$plname
$rpname
$plname
Datum
IC1
7667
2
c100
$plname
5
7
3R3
$plname
R1
158uH
$plname
L1
Name
Blatt
LP bs.:
LP un.:
Gepr ft
1 von 1
40128-117
30128-478
40128-117
31-05-95 M. Hagg
GND
R19
T2_TSI
GND-STE
U-NT-STE
IRFP450
$plname
T1
1n5
c225_6
C1
3R3
$plname
$plname
T2
MP3
MP4
1
1
2
3
4
5
J3
$plname
5
4
3
2
1
J2
$plname
Power-Module
30128-478
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Power-Module
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
MP1
MP2
2.0
U-HF-NE
U-HF-AE
IRFP450
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Vdd
+15V
Gezeich. 31-05-95 M.Fritz
D
51k
GND
$plname
2
30128-044
1
UE1
C2
R16
150pF
1k
D3
C9
$plname
C8
$rpname
3u3
7
68nF
UE2
$plname
ec130r
+
$plname
m3schraub
3
r150
3u3
$plname
TSI
+
$plname
J14
C28
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
$plname
22nF
5
c150
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
Power Module
30128-478
Power Module (UL)
30128-492
191 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Power Module (bare)
Power Module UL (bare)
40128-117
192 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
GND
0.8
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
D0
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
J1
0.6
RESET
CS5
CS3
BUS
TSI-STE
F-ST
CS5
RESET
CS3
+24V
GND
Vdd
+15V
BUS
CS5
RESET
GND
68nF
SG
14
13
11
6
D3
D4
D5
9
8
7
6
5
3
4
8x4k7
RN1
4
D2
2
3
D1
9
1
D0
BUS
TSI-STE
4
5
6
7
8
9
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
1
1D
RN2
11
10
Vdd
+15V
7
10
12
15
5
2
8x10k
40174
R
C1
IC6
3
2
D1
D0
AUS
MP3
1
14
GND
10
7
9
11
8
12
6
15
16
ULN2004A 13
GND
5
2
1
4
3
AUS
3
2
1
15
14
12
13
6
4
5
7
9
IC7
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Vdd
+15V
4020
R
CLK
IC1
MP1
F-ST
B
Nr.
REL19
REL3
REL2
REL1
1
1
SG
Vdd
+15V
REL19
GND
nderung
R1,R2 neu hinzu
+24V
J2
J3
REL19
C9
GND
Datum
Name
5
IC4
7667
1
7
Fritz
J14
2
3
B
D4
150pF
D1
10R
R3
1N4148
11N80
T1
GND
Datum
MUR860
Name
GND
L1
Blatt 1 von 1
LP un.:
40128-129
LP bs.: 30128-555
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 15-03-96 M.Fritz
C3
IC4
7667
12-8-96
4
2
GND
u33
+
C4
68nF
C10
C6
+15V
Vdd
3u3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
C5
5
6n8
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
GND
2
1nF
C2
REL1
REL2
REL3
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
J7
J6
J5
J4
30128-555
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ST-Power-Stage
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
REL1
4k7
REL2
R1
4k7
R2
C1
1nF
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
1
UE1
REL3
NE
AE
ICC 200, 300, 350
ST Power Stage
30128-555
193 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
ST Power Stage (bare)
40128-129
194 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
AE
NE_NESSY
2
AE
2
3
REL2
5
J9
3
4
FROM GENERATOR
1
REL1
REL1
3
NE
1
2
REL2
REL3
REL3
J7
J2
NE
C1
J10
1
150pF
J8
UE1
2
2
100:8
1
UE2
1
1:50
GND
MP1
GND
GND
R20
10k
68nF
C12
68nF
Vee
-15V
6
IC3
LM319
11
+
GND
GND
R22
7k5
Vdd
+15V
C11
GND
R17
18k
1k
GND
GND
GND
GND
3M3
GND
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
4
5
68nF
4
68nF
Vee
-15V
11 C31
-
IC8
TL084
+
+
GND
GND
8
GND
GND
3
GND
GND
IC3
LM319
-
Vdd
+15V
C32
GND
9
10
+
IC3
LM319
-
R23
7
12
Vdd
+15V
2
Nr.
D21
1N4148 1N4148
D20
GND
GND
T3
BS170
Vee
-15V
1
3
C27
TEILER
nderung
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
7k5
560R
MONO
AE
D16
D19
3
2
GND
2k
R47
D31
R25
Datum
12-1-98
GND
GND
GND
GND
Name
Fritz
GND
D32
GND
GND
GND
4
C15
-
8
Datum
4k7
R55
68nF
5
OFF
TZ
1
68nF
C14
1N4148
D10
8
1
GND
6
GND
GND
6
GND
Blatt
LP
12.08.96
Fritz
Fritz
Name
1N4148
D23
1 von
3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IC8
TL084
-
R62
IC8
TL084
750R
R37
-
9
-
6k8
R39
8
1
30128-561
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
SENSO-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
10k
R51
7
R63
6k8
TL084
IC8
10 +
2
10k
R50
14
TL084
IC8
3 +
Gert/UNIT
5 +
6
-
12 +
13
750R
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
U_PHASE
R54
1k
R52
7k5
R48
1k
R36
7k5
1N4148
D27
40128-130
bs.: 30128-561
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 12.08.96
B
GND
C29
5
OFF
TZ
1
68nF
TL084
IC9
3 +
Vee
-15V
3 +
-
2
7
4
IC4
AD844
-+
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
2
7
68nF
C28
1N4148
IC7
AD844
-+
3 +
-
2
Vdd
+15V
D26
R49
R53
R21
D33
R67
BIPOLAR
NE
AE
1
R11
R15
R16
1k
R12
2k
2k
D17
R74
D18
1N4148
1N4148
15V
10k
J5
J3
J1
R14
R13
10k
10R
D22
R38
220pF
1N4148
470R
R24
1k3
2k
D28
R40
C13
1M
C30
1M
C33
1nF
1nF
1N4148
2k
1N4148
u22
D29
R65
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
4k7
R61
R64
5
GND
4k7
GND
4k7
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
UP_HF_A
UP_HF
IP_PAT_A
IP_PAT
ICC 200, 300, 350
Senso-board
30128-561
195 / 266
NE
3u3
+
GND
R34
D25
R4
C26
R5
Vdd
+15V
750k
GND
C25
750k
IMAS
15V
D2
GND
+
15V
D1
1uF
R2
R6
2
10k
GND
1
T6
BC547
3
Vdd
+15V
R7
10k
150k
750k
1k
3V
C5
C24
C23
R35
UE6
4
IC2
TL082
2
12:16
1
3 +
8
+
I+9
I-9
GND
IC2
TL082
-
D6
D4
1N4148
1N4148
R9
IMAS
10R
5 +
6
IMAS
I+9
R3
R1
1uF
10nF
R8
10nF
2n2
56R
1k
C8
+
750k
C9
C10
18pF
18pF
7
1nF
C7
9V1
AE
1
3
1
2
9
12
8
6
4
5
4047
RCX
CX
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
IC1
G
11
Q
7
IMAS
I-9
I+9
13
10
Q
OSC OUT
14
5
Nr.
nderung
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
+
IC2
TL082
D3
C6
I+9
IMAS
-
1uF
D5
2
Datum
12-1-98
2
2
Name
Fritz
3
T1
VN10KM
1
3
Blatt 2 von
LP un.:
3
40128-130
LP bs.: 30128-561
Gepr ft
Fritz
3
12.08.96
Name
8:8:8
2
1
UE5
Fritz
Datum
220pF
Gezeich. 12.08.96
B
C4
T2
VN10KM
1
IMAS
R10
GND
10nF
0R
R32
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
1N4148
D15
C22
196 / 266
9V1
1k
22k
11
Vee
-15V
-
IC9
TL084
+
Vdd
+15V
4
7
GND
4k7
R58
30128-561
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
SENSO-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
GND
-
IC9
TL084
5 +
6
U_FUNKE
ICC 200, 300, 350
Senso-board
30128-561
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
R33
R18
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
GND
2
2
2k4
R19
OSZI_DIS
3
BC557
T5
1
1
T4
BC547
3
C19
GND
C17
2k4
1nF
C39
C37
3m3
150R
2
1nF
C16
9:7
1
R30
2
10k
GND
220pF
L1
10nF
R29
3u3
R41
C2
1
1
7
T7
BS170
GND
GND
2
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
GND
3
R28
2k4
4k7
GND
1
3
GND
4
68nF
C21
2
3
Vee
-15V
+
-
4
T8
BS170
B B/S
5 6
-
8
+
LM311
IC6
1
5
IC5 B/C1 C2
LM318 B/C3
-+
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
C18
7 68nF
3 +
-
2
Vdd
+15V
3
8
2:2:15
2
1
UE3
L2
GND
GND
6
GND
C38
2n2
R31
1N4148
R42
R43
C3
5k6
D24
u1
R72
12k
10k
GND
100R
R60
1k
100uH
R73
68nF
NE
D9
1N4148
D30
1N4148
GND
10k
R26
GND
R27
GND
1k
-
Nr.
12-1-98
R56
3k
GND
8
nderung
Datum
Name
Fritz
15
TEILER
Blatt 3 von
LP un.:
3
40128-130
LP bs.: 30128-561
Gepr ft
Fritz
Name
R70
+24V
2
Vcc
+5V
1
2
Vdd
+15V
GND
1
T10
BC547
3
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
30128-561
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A10
D2
J6
D1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
D0
GND
SENSO-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
T9
BC547
GND
1
IP_PAT
IP_PAT_A
UP_HF
UP_HF_A
U_PHASE
U_NESSY
U_SYM
U_FUNKE
STEUERBUS
3
GND
+24V
Vee
-15V
T11
BC547
2
1N4148
GND
3
REL2
D14
D13
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
10k
10k
R68
10k
R69
OSZI_DIS
12.08.96
Datum
40174
12
10
7
5
2
Fritz
1D
R
C1
IC10
U_NESSY
U_SYM
Gezeich. 12.08.96
B
14
11
D3
D5
6
D2
13
4
D1
D4
3
D0
9
Vdd
+15V
14
GND
9
-
TL084
IC9
10 +
1
13
TL084
IC9
12 +
GND
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
STEUERBUS
C34
3
2
D0
J4
3
D1
2
4
D2
UE4
R46
5
D3
10k
10k
R45
C57
6
D4
R57
7
D5
C20
5k6
1uF
8
68nF
R59
+
1
3k
8x10k
9
+
+
1
R66
D6
R44
30k
RN1
4k7
D7
u1
R71
10k
1N4148
C36
C35
NE_NESSY
1k
REL3
D7
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
1N4148
3u3
3u3
5
REL1
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
Senso-board
30128-561
197 / 266
+
ICC 200, 300, 350
Senso-board (bare)
40128-130
198 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
nderung
Datum
QK-Endstufe
J5
J4
2
1
2
1
Name
J1
J2
J6
5
Nr.
Mainboard
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Datum
Name
J3
17-05-95 M.Hagg
Blatt 1 von 1
LP bs.: 30128-479
LP un.: 40128-118
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 17-05-95 M.Fritz
A
1
2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Power-Module
30128-479
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Upper Wiring Module
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200, 300, 350
Upper Wiring Module
30128-479
199 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Upper Wiring Module (bare)
40128-118
200 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 200
202 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RESET
PSD1
PSD3
PSD5
PSD7
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN6
EIN5
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-1
GND
+24V
+24V
C31
C32
A32
C30
C29
C28
C27
C26
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
C25
24V-TR
PSD0
PSD2
PSD4
PSD6
EIN23
EIN22
EIN21
EIN20
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A25
SICHER
C23
A23
C24
A22
C22
A22
A24
A21
C21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A21
EIN19
EIN18
EIN17
EIN16
EIN15
C20
C19
C18
C17
C16
EIN14
A15
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
C15
A14
A13
A15
EIN13
C13
A13
EIN12
A12
C12
A12
C14
A11
C11
A11
A14
A10
A9
A8
C10
C9
C8
A10
A9
A8
SET
A6
A7
A5
CS
C6
C7
C5
A6
A7
A5
Vcc
+5V
24V-TR
I-HFL
U-PHASE
UP-HF-A
UP-HF
IP-PAT-A
IP-PAT
RES-ANA1
RES-ANA2
I-HFL
TSI-STE
U-PRIM
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
RESET
CS1
RESET
ESD6
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD5
ESD7
ESD2
ESD3
ESD4
ESD3
ESD4
ESD1
ESD1
ESD2
ESD0
Vcc
+5V
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
GND
Nr.
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
nderung
RN18=2k2
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
A5
A6
B4
A4
B3
+24V
GND
Vcc
+5V
Datum
8-93
U-NESSY
U-SYM
U-FUNKE
U-NETZT
U-INT
U-INP
AUS
AN
B
A
TSI
TEMP
STE-EIN
HF-EIN
NT-EIN
SICHER
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-1
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
MF
+24V
GND
Name
AUS
AN
B
A
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Datum
Vcc
+5V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Name
Blatt
LP un.:
1 von
5
40128-025
LP bs.: 30128-033
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
B
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
+24V
GND
Vcc
+5V
U-NETZT
U-INT
U-INP
U-PRIM
TSI
TEMP
REL-NT
NTE
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
GND
Vcc
+5V
30128-033
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard 200
Benennung/Title
TSI-STE
F-ST
CS7
RESET
CS6
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
ICC 200
Gert/UNIT
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A4
C4
A4
A3
A1
GND
A3
C3
A3
GND
A2
A2
B2
A2
J6
A1
A1
B1
A1
A2
J5
ST-Endstufe
A1
J4
Leistungsteil
C2
J3
QK-Endstufe
C1
J2
Control-Board
A2
Vcc
+5V
Kleinspannung+Ton
A1
J1
CPU
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
203 / 266
Vcc
+5V
5
CS12
CS11
RESET
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
-15V
Vee
RES-ANA2
RES-ANA1
Vdd
+15V
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
+24V
GND
Vcc
+5V
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
4
3
5
2
1
J9
IP-PAT
IP-PAT-A
UP-HF
UP-HF-A
U-PHASE
U-NESSY
U-SYM
U-FUNKE
RESET
CS8
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
GND
9
GND
RES-F5
RES-F4
RES-F3
RES-F2
RES-F1
RES-B6
RES-B5
RES-B4
RES-B3
RES-B2
RES-B1
FING-B3
FING-A3
Vdd
+15V
10
8
6
7
4
FING-B1
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
SET
PSD3
PSD2
PSD1
PSD0
CS
Vcc
+5V
RESET
C24
10k
R2
10k
R1
Nr.
nderung
RN18=2k2
0
1
2
3
1
C20
4
5
2
20D 0
6
3
0
7
G
21
15 8
22
3
9
10
23
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
DMUX
IC4
15
16
13
14
19
20
17
18
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
11
Datum
3
8
Name
MF
4
9
RN8
8-93
1
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
Datum
C4
IC10
Name
CS14
C3
Blatt
LP
2 von
5
40128-025
bs.: 30128-033
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
10
7
CS13
11
6
GND
12
5
9
13
4
15
14
8
ULN2004A
3
2
16
10
7
IC11
11
6
1
12
5
GND
13
9
14
15
16
4
8
ULN2004A
3
2
1
GND
68nF
GND
68nF
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
B
5
7
68nF
GND
7
5
FING-A1
8
4
2
2
5
J8
9
3
1
3
-15V
+24V Vee
GND
+24V
RELAIS
8*10k
2
A3
RN16
A2
2
2
A1
3
3
J7
4
4
RN15
5
5
Vdd
+15V
6
6
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
7
CS12
CS11
CS10
CS9
CS8
CS7
CS6
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
30128-033
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard 200
Ton J2
RESET
Benennung/Title
ICC 200
Gert/UNIT
7
Vcc
+5V
8
1
1
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
8*10k
Mono-Output-Board
1
6
6
RN9
9
8
204 / 266
9
Senso-Board
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
J12
1
C32
6
u022
GND
1
1
R5
100R
J19
J21 J17
J22 J18
1
F1
T200mA
1
1
1
J20
24V
TR1
J16
Sek.
1
-
~
~
5
-
J15
1
BH37933
+
BR1
C6
Nr.
B250C5000
+
BR2
C7
REL1
D1
+
nderung
2
3
6
Datum
8-93
J14
Name
MF
Leistungsteil
D2
24V-TR
RN18=2k2
GND
3k6
$wert
1N4148
R3
u68
2
+
+
RLV
680uF
R6
680uF
R9
+24V
Datum
Name
GND
68nF
Blatt
3 von
5
LP bs.: 30128-033
LP un.: 40128-025
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
B
Vee
-15V
C11
REL1
68nF
C9
MASSE
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
Vcc
+5V
C23
C22
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
Vdd
+15V
68nF
1
Gehuse
J11
u022
C33
0.5
+24V
GND
C10
C8
3
2
1
1
J13
Vcc
+5V
GND
0.5
0.5
30128-033
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard 200
Benennung/Title
ICC 200
Gert/UNIT
J10
Frontplatte
GND
68nF
REL1
Prim.1
Prim.2
~
~
22k
22k
C5
C15
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
1000uF
68nF
5
68nF
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
205 / 266
SICHER
CS14
CS13
RESET
Vcc
+5V
GND
3
Vcc
+5V
GND
7
10
12
15
6
11
13
14
40174
5
1D
R
C1
4
3
9
1
1N4148
2
15
14
IC3
12
13
D4
10
11
40174
7
6
2
5
1D
R
C1
IC2
2k2
4
3
9
1
1N4148
D3
$wert
R10
Vdd
+15V
RN7
D8
Nr.
2
2
PSD7
8
8
PSD6
7
7
RN6
6
6
PSD5
1
1
PSD4
5
5
PSD3
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
nderung
RN18=2k2
3
3
PSD2
8*10k
8*10k
PSD1
C1
9
9
RN5
2
IC7
Datum
8-93
Name
MF
10
7
GND
11
6
9
12
5
8
13
4
15
14
ULN2004A
3
2
16
10
7
IC9
11
6
1
12
5
GND
13
9
14
15
16
4
8
ULN2004A
3
2
IC8
10
7
1
11
6
GND
12
5
9
13
4
15
16
14
8
ULN2004A
3
2
1
Datum
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
Name
Vdd
+15V
Blatt
LP un.:
4 von
5
40128-025
LP bs.: 30128-033
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
B
RN12
2
RN14
1
1
1
PSD0
68nF
5
68nF
4
4
3
3
2
RN13
4
3
4
5
4
5
6
5
6
7
6
7
8
7
8*10k
8*10k
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
8*10k
8
2
8
9
9
9
206 / 266
30128-033
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard 200
Benennung/Title
ICC 200
Gert/UNIT
SICHER
STE-EIN
RLV
RELAIS
REL-NT
RES-F5
RES-F4
RES-F3
NTE
RES-F2
RES-F1
NT-EIN
HF-EIN
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
ext. Steuerbus
Signalleitungen
GND
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
9
8*4k7
8
7
6
5
4
1
C2
PIO-Ausgnge
J25
J24
RES-B3
RES-B2
RES-B1
F-ST
3
2
1
3
2
1
680R
680R
R19
R13
680R
680R
R16
R11
FuÆschalter 2
680R
R18
Vdd
+15V
680R
R17
Vdd
+15V
7
680R
R15
680R
GND
GND
GND
1
680R
R14
8
C17
C19
C20
3
68nF
C16
68nF
C18
Vdd
+15V
3
5
GND
68nF
FING-A3
FING-B3
GND
68nF
3
GND
9
3
9
7
11
5
14
2
4
4050
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
IC1
2k2
2
10
6
12
4
15
9
7
5
11
14
3
4050
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
IC13
10
6
4
12
15
2
5
3
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
Nr.
RES-B6
FUFI-A3
nderung
RN18=2k2
EIN12
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN22
Datum
RES-B5
FUFI-B3
MF
FUSS-B2
FUSS-A2
8-93
FUSS-A2
FUSS-B2
Name
6
6
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
Name
GND
RN11
Blatt
5 von
5
LP bs.: 30128-033
LP un.: 40128-025
Gepr ft
9
9
8*10k
8*10k
4050
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
IC6
4050
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
IC5
10
6
12
4
2
15
10
6
12
4
2
15
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
9
7
11
5
3
14
9
7
11
5
3
14
1
1
RN4
RN17
7
2
1
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
30128-033
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard 200
Benennung/Title
ICC 200
Gert/UNIT
2
2
RN10
5
5
Datum
7
7
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
B
FUFI-A3
FUFI-B3
FING-B1
FING-A1
FUSS-B1
FUSS-A1
EIN21
FUSS-A1
FUSS-B1
3
3
RN18
2
68nF
4
68nF
C21
6
7
8*10k
2
RN1
Vdd
+15V
4
R12
5
1
5
7
8*10k
J23
4
4
RN3
5
5
GND
8
8
FuÆschalter 1
RN2
9
6
6
Vdd
+15V
9
GND
2
8
8
7
7
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
3
8*10k
8*10k
8
1
6
5
9
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
EIN16
EIN15
EIN14
EIN13
EIN6
EIN5
EIN23
EIN18
EIN17
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
EIN20
EIN19
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
207 / 266
9
8
6
4
9
8
6
1
ICC 200
Motherboard (bare)
40128-025
208 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
GND
0.9
0.6
Vdd
+15V
C5
9
GND
Vdd
+15V
10
8
6
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
2
FING_B1
Vdd
+15V
3u3
4
T1
7
Vdd
+15V
GND
3
1
2
9
14
15
13
12
11
12
8
6
4
5
GND
&
+
2
C4
3u3
G
4528
D8
Q
Q
OSC OUT
4047
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC3
RCX
CX
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
IC2
GND
1
T2
BC517
3
RELAIS
+24V
1N4148
13
11
10
9
10
GND
1
3
C3
10:10:32
2
T1
BC517
3
UE2
1
Vdd
+15V
1nF
5k1
R6
2
1
3
4
5
Vdd
+15V
&
13
12
9
8
4011
&
4011
IC5
&
Nr.
nderung
J2
R2
J1
Datum
1
2
3
3
2
1
Name
Fritz
Fritz
11
10
150R
IC5
GND
22.6.94
1k
R8
14.7.94
7
6
SFH450
IC1
C2
B 3192 C11=10nF
D5
11V
100pF
C 3252 s.Aenderungsmit.
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC3
R4
R3
REL1
D9
R10
680R
5
T2
D3
D4
3
D10
R11
SD101A
4k7
R7
REL1
C
2
1
5
6
3
4
E
Datum
4011
&
4011
IC5
&
Vdd
+15V
IC5
T2
T1
R9
Blatt
LP bs.:
LP un.:
Gepr ft
5k1
Hagg
Fritz
Name
GND
UE1
1 von 1
40128-096
30128-358
14-07-94
Gezeich. 17-02-94
C
Vdd
+15V
56R
R1
REL1
10nF
FING_A1
B
2
4k7
68nF
SD101A
4k7
+24V
J5
68nF
C10
IC1
SFH350
1
C7
D6
D7
6
4013
S
C
D
R
IC4
4013
S
C
D
R
IC4
C11
12
13
2
1
BA159
BA159
D1
D2
10nF
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
10
9
11
8
4
5
3
3
1
RELAIS
C1
+
R5
68nF
6n8
1N4148
1N4148
1N4148
1N4148
C9
510R
+15V
Vdd
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10k
C6
10nF
4
5
2
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
J4
J3
ICC 200
30128-358
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Mono-Output-Board
Benennung/Title
Gert/UNIT
FING_B1
FING_A1
3
2
1
3
2
1
ICC 200
Mono Output
30128-358
209 / 266
C8
ICC 200
Mono Output (bare)
40128-096
210 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 300
212 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RESET
PSD1
PSD3
PSD5
PSD7
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN6
EIN5
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-1
GND
A12
A13
A21
A22
A23
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
24V-TR
PSD0
PSD2
PSD4
PSD6
EIN23
EIN22
EIN21
EIN20
SICHER
EIN19
EIN18
EIN17
EIN16
EIN15
EIN14
EIN13
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A11
C11
A11
EIN12
A9
Vcc
+5V
24V-TR
RESET
CS1
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
U-PHASE
UP-HF-A
UP-HF
IP-PAT-A
IP-PAT
RES-ANA1
RES-ANA2
I-HFL
TSI-STE
U-PRIM
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
RESET
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vcc
+5V
A17
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
Name
A16
B14
A14
nderung
A15
B13
A13
Nr.
A14
B12
Datum
U-NESSY
U-SYM
U-FUNKE
U-NETZT
U-INT
U-INP
AUS
AN
B
A
TSI
TEMP
STE-EIN
HF-EIN
NT-EIN
SICHER
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
B11
A9
A8
Name
A9
A8
A9
A8
A23
A23
A23
A24
A25
A27
A30
A31
A32
A29
A30
A31
A32
A29
A30
A31
A32
A
Datum
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
1 von 5
LP bs.: 30128-394
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
U-NETZT
GND
Vcc
+5V
30128-394
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
TSI-STE
F-ST
CS7
RESET
CS6
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
Benennung/Title
ICC300
Gert/UNIT
A29
A28
A26
U-INT
U-INP
A28
AUS
A28
A26
A27
U-PRIM
A25
TSI
A24
A27
AN
B
TEMP
A26
A25
A
A22
A22
A22
A24
A21
A21
A19
A21
REL-NT
A20
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A20
NTE
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A19
Vcc
+5V
A20
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A19
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A18
Vcc
+5V
A7
A6
A5
A4
A18
A13
A12
A11
A10
A12
ANALOG-1
A11
Vcc
+5V
B9
A10
B8
B10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A8
A10
SET
C9
A10
A7
A6
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
C8
C10
A9
B7
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A8
B6
A7
B5
A6
A5
A7
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
A6
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A5
CS
C7
A4
A3
C6
+24V
C5
+24V
A7
+24V
A6
B4
A4
A5
+24V
A2
+24V
A4
C4
GND
A4
A3
A1
GND
A2
A3
A2
B3
A3
GND
B2
A2
GND
A3
C3
A3
GND
A2
C2
A2
J6
A1
A1
J5
ST-Endstufe
B1
J4
Leistungsteil
A1
J3
QK-Endstufe
A1
J2
Control-Board
C1
Vcc
+5V
Kleinspannung+Ton
A1
J1
CPU
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
213 / 266
NE Nessy
AE2 Gen.
AE1 Gen.
J26
J29
J28
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
5
Vcc
+5V
FING-B2
FING-A2
FING-B1
FING-A1
CS11
CS10
RESET
CS9
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
D26
BA159
BA159
D25
D24
2
3
J27
J58
C24
10k
R2
10k
R1
GND
NE Bu.
AE2 Bu.
Nr.
23
22
21
3
2
1
nderung
0
1
2
3
C20
4
5
20D 0
6
0
7
G
15 8
3
9
10
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
DMUX
IC4
15
16
13
14
19
20
17
18
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
11
Datum
1
5
7
4
9
3
8
Name
6
6
8*10k
Datum
C4
7
5
13
12
11
10
4
5
6
7
13
12
11
10
3
4
5
6
7
Name
CS14
CS13
GND
1
C3
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt 2 von 5
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC11
GND
9
14
3
8
16
2
IC10
ULN2004A 15
1
GND
68nF
GND
68nF
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
A
8
4
Vcc
+5V
9
3
68nF
AE1 Bu.
Vcc
+5V
SET
PSD3
PSD2
PSD1
PSD0
CS
Vcc
+5V
RESET
J57
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
BA159
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
GND
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
BA159
D27
IP-PAT
IP-PAT-A
UP-HF
UP-HF-A
U-PHASE
U-NESSY
U-SYM
U-FUNKE
RESET
CS8
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
8*10k
2
A2
RN15
RN16
A1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Vcc
+5V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
GND
2
RN9
A3
J8
2
2
Vdd
+15V
3
3
Vcc
+5V
4
4
Vcc
+5V
5
5
1
1
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
6
6
A2
UE1
7
CS13
CS12
CS11
CS10
CS9
CS8
CS7
CS6
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
RESET
J10 Res.
J10 Res.
Ton J2
30128-394
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC300
Gert/UNIT
7
A1
4
1
8
J7
5
2
8*10k
$wert
Refi-Board
6
3
9
8
214 / 266
9
Senso-Board
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RN8
J12
1
C32
6
u022
GND
1
1
R5
100R
J19
J21 J17
J22 J18
1
F1
T200mA
1
1
1
J20
24V
TR1
J16
Sek.
1
-
~
~
5
-
J15
1
BH37933
+
BR1
C6
Nr.
B250C5000
+
BR2
C7
2
D1
nderung
GND
3k6
D2
2
3
6
Datum
J14
Name
Leistungsteil
rot
24V-TR
1N4148
R3
u68
REL1
+
+
RLV
680uF
R6
680uF
R9
+24V
Datum
Name
GND
68nF
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
LP un.:
3 von 5
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
A
Vee
-15V
C11
REL1
68nF
C9
MASSE
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
Vcc
+5V
C23
C22
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
Vdd
+15V
68nF
1
Gehuse
J11
u022
C33
0.5
+24V
GND
C10
C8
3
2
1
J13
Vcc
+5V
GND
0.5
0.5
30128-394
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC300
Gert/UNIT
1
J10
Frontplatte
GND
68nF
REL1
Prim.1
Prim.2
~
~
22k
22k
C5
C15
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
1000uF
68nF
5
68nF
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
215 / 266
+
SICHER
CS14
CS13
RESET
Vcc
+5V
GND
3
2
Vcc
+5V
GND
7
10
12
15
6
11
13
14
40174
5
1D
R
C1
4
3
9
1
1N4148
2
15
14
IC3
12
13
D4
10
11
40174
7
6
2
5
1D
R
C1
IC2
2k2
4
3
9
1
1N4148
D3
RN6
RN7
rot
Vdd
+15V
Nr.
2
2
R10
8
8
D8
7
7
PSD7
6
6
PSD6
1
1
PSD5
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
5
5
PSD4
8*10k
nderung
8*10k
PSD3
3
3
PSD2
9
9
PSD1
C1
4
4
13
12
11
10
4
5
6
7
13
12
11
10
3
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
4
5
6
7
Datum
GND
Name
13
3
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC9
GND
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC8
GND
9
14
3
8
16
2
IC7
ULN2004A 15
1
3
4
3
2
3
2
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
20-07-94 M.Hagg
30128-394
4 von 5
LP bs.:
Blatt
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
8
2
8
Vdd
+15V
Name
4
5
4
Datum
5
6
5
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
A
RN12
RN13
RN14
6
7
6
1
1
1
7
8
7
8*10k
8*10k
8*10k
PSD0
68nF
5
68nF
9
9
9
216 / 266
30128-394
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC300
Gert/UNIT
SICHER
STE-EIN
RLV
R-BF/CF
REL-NT
RES-F5
RES-F4
RES-F3
NTE
RES-F2
RES-F1
NT-EIN
HF-EIN
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
ext. Steuerbus
Signalleitungen
GND
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
9
8
8*4k7
7
6
5
4
1
C2
RN5
PIO-Ausgnge
0R
GND
BF/CF
J25
J24
F-ST
RES-B3
RES-B2
RES-B1
BF/CF
3
2
1
3
2
1
680R
680R
R19
R13
680R
680R
R16
R11
680R
R18
Vdd
+15V
680R
R17
Vdd
+15V
RN2
FuÆschalter 2
9
680R
R15
680R
GND
GND
GND
1
680R
R14
Vdd
+15V
8
C17
C19
C20
7
68nF
C16
68nF
C18
5
GND
68nF
7
FING-A3
FING-B3
GND
68nF
GND
68nF
4
68nF
C21
6
3
8*10k
3
9
3
9
7
11
5
2
4050
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
IC1
4
14
2
10
6
12
4
15
9
7
5
11
14
3
4050
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
IC13
RN1
2
3
RN18
2
10
6
4
12
15
2
2
1
Vdd
+15V
4
R12
5
1
5
3
Vcc
+5V
9
J23
5
Vdd
+15V
6
8*10k
RN17
7
FuÆschalter 1
2
8*10k
Nr.
RES-B5
RES-B6
FUFI-B3
FUFI-A3
Datum
FUSS-B2
FUSS-A2
EIN12
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN22
nderung
FUSS-A2
FUSS-B2
Name
6
6
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
Name
5
5
RN10
RN11
Datum
7
7
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt 5 von 5
LP bs.: 30128-394
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
8
8
8*10k
8*10k
9
7
1
4050
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
IC6
4050
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
11
5
3
1
4050
IC5
14
9
7
1
4050
IC5
11
5
3
4050
IC5
1
IC5
14
10
6
12
4
2
15
10
6
12
4
2
15
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
9
9
GND
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
A
FUFI-A3
FUFI-B3
FING-B2
FING-A2
FING-B1
FING-A1
FUSS-B1
FUSS-A1
EIN21
FUSS-A1
FUSS-B1
7
Vcc
+5V
5
5
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
30128-394
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC300
Gert/UNIT
8
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
8*10k
RN3
RN4
GND
6
6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
7
GND
9
8
8
1
6
7
5
9
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
EIN16
EIN15
EIN14
EIN13
EIN6
EIN5
EIN23
EIN18
EIN17
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
EIN20
EIN19
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
217 / 266
9
8
4
8*2k2
8
6
1
3
R20
ICC 300
Motherboard (bare)
40128-092
218 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
J1
13
4
3
14
D2
D3
D4
D5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
D0
A10
A9
0.6
Vdd
+15V
0.6
GND
0.8
FING_B2
FING_A2
FING_B1
FING_A1
Vee
-15V
+24V
STEUERBUS
Vcc
+5V
A8
A7
Vdd
+15V
15
2
5
12
7
10
GND
STEUERBUS
40174
+24V
1D
R
C1
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
6
D1
MP1
11
D0
9
R14
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
10k
R15
10k
STEUERBUS
Vdd
+15V
GND
REL1
RN1
3
Vdd
+15V
GND
D15
1
GND
Vdd
+15V
3
1
2
9
12
8
6
4
5
GND
1N4148
2
REL2
RCX
CX
C14
GND
G
2
1
3
4
5
Q
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC5
13
11
10
&
1N4148
Q
OSC OUT
GND
T4
BC547
+24V
7
6
5k1
R22
14
15
13
12
11
Vdd
+15V
2
2
&
GND
1
3u3
9
10
Nr.
nderung
GND
1
3
1
2
6
5
4011
&
IC4
4011
&
IC4
GND
Datum
Name
3
4
10:10:32
2
T6
BC517
3
UE2
1
Vdd
+15V
GND
1
3
10:10:32
T2
BC517
3
2
B
D1
4011
&
IC4
4011
&
Datum
12
13
9
8
Vdd
+15V
IC4
11
10
T2
T1
GND
D14
11V
D5
11V
Name
E
14-07-94
M.Hagg
Blatt 1 von 1
LP bs.: 30128-352
LP un.: 40128-093
Gepr ft
SFH450
IC2
SFH450
IC1
D4
GND
10
9
11
8
4
5
3
6
1N4148
4013
S
C
D
R
IC3
4013
S
C
D
R
IC3
R23
R6
150R
12
13
2
1
GND
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Vdd
+15V
Gezeich. 10-02-94 M.Fritz
Vdd
+15V
C4
C5
1N4148
1N4148
R2
10nF
R1
56R
R5
56R
GND
10
9
11
8
4
5
3
6
4013
S
C
D
R
IC7
4013
S
C
D
R
IC7
12
13
2
1
30128-352
3
2
1
3
2
1
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
RELAIS-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
10nF
150R
0R
D6
0R
D9
UE1
1
14-7-94 Fritz
R21
1k
2
C8
3u3
+
2
+
B 3251 s.Anderungsmit.
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC5
GND
T5
BC517
3
GND
1
T1
BC517
3
GND
C9
SD101A
REL2
4047
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
IC6
Vdd
+15V
T3
BC547
GND
Vdd
+15V
8x10k
2
+24V
REL2
R25
1
1
4k7
3
1
n.best.
D16
SD101A
4k7
D17
R13
D19
R16
IC8
J2
R19
68nF
T1
T1
D18
R17
D20
R18
4k7
SD101A
4k7
n.best
n.best
Vdd
+15V
100pF
T2
T2
1nF
1nF
R8
R7
R10
R9
REL1
6n8
5k1
680R
510R
680R
510R
C
D2
D10
D11
B
2
+
R20
1N4148
1N4148
IC1
SFH350
D7
D8
3
R24
3u3
C10
C
D3
D12
D13
B
C3
C2
E
1N4148
1N4148
1N4148
IC2
SFH350
C1
C6
R3
R4
10nF
10nF
5k1
n.best
n.best
REL1
C11
SD101A
4k7
+15V
Vdd
1
10k
C13
68nF
C12
FING_A1
FING_B1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
68nF
J4
J3
FING_A2
5
FING_B2
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 300
Relay Board
30128-352
219 / 266
C7
ICC 300
Relay Board (bare)
40128-093
220 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 350
222 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RESET
PSD1
PSD3
PSD5
PSD7
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN6
EIN5
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-1
GND
A12
A13
A21
A22
A23
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
24V-TR
PSD0
PSD2
PSD4
PSD6
EIN23
EIN22
EIN21
EIN20
SICHER
EIN19
EIN18
EIN17
EIN16
EIN15
EIN14
EIN13
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A11
C11
A11
EIN12
A9
Vcc
+5V
24V-TR
RESET
CS1
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
U-PHASE
UP-HF-A
UP-HF
IP-PAT-A
IP-PAT
RES-ANA1
RES-ANA2
I-HFL
TSI-STE
U-PRIM
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
RESET
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vcc
+5V
Name
A16
A17
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
nderung
A15
B13
A13
Nr.
A14
B12
Datum
U-NESSY
U-SYM
U-FUNKE
U-NETZT
U-INT
U-INP
AUS
AN
B
A
TSI
TEMP
STE-EIN
HF-EIN
NT-EIN
SICHER
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-2
B11
A12
ANALOG-1
A9
A8
Name
A9
A23
A23
A23
A24
A25
A27
A30
A31
A32
A29
A30
A31
A32
A29
A30
A31
A32
A
Datum
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
LP un.:
1 von 6
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
U-NETZT
U-INT
GND
Vcc
+5V
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
TSI-STE
F-ST
CS7
RESET
CS6
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
A29
A28
A26
U-INP
A28
AUS
A28
A26
A27
U-PRIM
A25
TSI
A24
A27
AN
B
TEMP
A26
A25
A
A22
A22
A22
A24
A21
A21
A21
A19
A20
REL-NT
A20
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A19
NTE
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A8
A10
A20
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
Vcc
+5V
A19
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A9
A8
A10
A18
Vcc
+5V
A7
A6
A5
A4
A18
A13
A12
A11
A10
A11
Vcc
+5V
B9
A10
B8
B10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A8
A10
SET
C9
A10
A7
A6
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
C8
C10
A9
B7
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A8
B6
A7
B5
A6
A5
A7
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
A6
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A5
C7
CS
C6
A4
A3
C5
+24V
A7
+24V
A6
+24V
A5
+24V
B4
A4
A2
+24V
GND
A4
A3
C4
GND
A4
A3
A1
GND
B3
A3
A3
C3
A3
GND
A2
A2
B2
A2
J6
A1
A1
B1
A1
A2
J5
ST-Endstufe
A1
GND
J4
Leistungsteil
C2
J3
QK-Endstufe
C1
J2
Control-Board
A2
Vcc
+5V
Kleinspannung+Ton
A1
J1
CPU
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
223 / 266
Vcc
+5V
5
2
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
CS13
CS12
CS11
RESET
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
RES-ANA2
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
4
5
nicht bestueckt
+24V
3
J9
RES-F6
RES-F4
RES-F3
RES-F2
RES-F1
RES-B6
RES-B5
RES-B4
RES-B3
RES-B2
RES-B1
FING-B3
FING-A3
-15V
+24V Vee
GND
A32
A32
1
A31
A31
-15V
Vee
A30
A30
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A29
IP-PAT
IP-PAT-A
UP-HF
UP-HF-A
U-PHASE
U-NESSY
U-SYM
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
U-FUNKE
A21
GND
A9
A8
A10
A20
RESET
CS8
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
A7
A6
A21
RES-ANA1
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A5
A3
GND
Vcc
+5V
FING-B2
FING-A2
FING-B1
FING-A1
CS11
CS10
RESET
CS9
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
Vcc
+5V
SET
PSD3
PSD2
PSD1
PSD0
CS
Vcc
+5V
RESET
C24
10k
R2
10k
R1
Nr.
23
22
21
3
2
1
nderung
0
1
2
3
C20
4
5
20D 0
6
0
7
G
15 8
3
9
10
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
DMUX
IC4
15
16
13
14
19
20
17
18
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
11
Datum
1
5
7
4
9
3
8
Name
6
6
8*10k
Datum
C4
7
5
2
RN9
13
12
11
10
4
5
6
7
13
12
11
10
3
4
5
6
7
Name
CS14
CS13
GND
1
C3
Blatt
LP
20-07-94 M.Hagg
2 von 6
40128-092
bs.: 30128-351
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC11
GND
9
14
3
8
16
2
IC10
ULN2004A 15
1
GND
68nF
GND
68nF
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
A
8
4
Vcc
+5V
9
3
68nF
GND
8*10k
2
A2
+24V
A4
RN15
RN16
A1
GND
A3
2
2
A2
J8
3
3
A1
4
4
J7
5
5
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
6
6
Vcc
+5V
7
CS13
CS12
CS11
CS10
CS9
CS8
CS7
CS6
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
J10 Res.
J10 Res.
Ton J2
RESET
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
7
Vcc
+5V
8
1
1
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
$wert
Refi-Board
9
8
224 / 266
9
Senso-Board
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RN8
J12
1
C32
6
u022
GND
1
1
R5
100R
J19
J21 J17
J22 J18
1
F1
T200mA
1
1
1
J20
24V
TR1
J16
Sek.
1
-
~
~
5
-
J15
1
BH37933
+
BR1
C6
Nr.
B250C5000
+
BR2
C7
2
D1
nderung
GND
3k6
D2
2
3
6
Datum
J14
Name
Leistungsteil
rot
24V-TR
1N4148
R3
u68
REL1
+
+
RLV
680uF
R6
680uF
R9
+24V
Datum
Name
GND
68nF
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
LP un.:
3 von 6
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
A
Vee
-15V
C11
REL1
68nF
C9
MASSE
Vdd
+15V
GND
GND
Vcc
+5V
C23
C22
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
Vdd
+15V
68nF
1
Gehuse
J11
u022
C33
0.5
+24V
GND
C10
C8
3
2
1
J13
Vcc
+5V
GND
0.5
0.5
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
1
J10
Frontplatte
GND
68nF
REL1
Prim.1
Prim.2
~
~
22k
22k
C5
C15
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
1000uF
68nF
5
68nF
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
225 / 266
+
SICHER
CS14
CS13
RESET
Vcc
+5V
GND
3
2
Vcc
+5V
GND
12
13
40174
10
11
15
7
6
14
5
1D
R
C1
4
3
9
1
1N4148
2
15
14
IC3
12
13
D4
10
11
40174
7
6
2
5
1D
R
C1
IC2
2k2
4
3
9
1
1N4148
D3
RN6
RN7
rot
Vdd
+15V
Nr.
2
2
R10
8
8
D8
7
7
PSD7
6
6
PSD6
1
1
PSD5
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
5
5
PSD4
nderung
3
3
PSD3
8*10k
8*10k
PSD2
9
9
PSD1
C1
4
4
13
12
11
10
4
5
6
7
13
12
11
10
3
4
5
6
7
13
12
3
4
5
Datum
Name
10
7
GND
11
6
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC9
GND
9
14
2
8
16
ULN2004A 15
1
IC8
GND
9
14
3
8
16
2
IC7
ULN2004A 15
1
3
4
3
2
3
2
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
4 von 6
LP bs.: 30128-351
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
8
2
8
Vdd
+15V
Name
4
5
4
Datum
5
6
5
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
A
RN12
RN13
RN14
6
7
6
1
1
1
7
8
7
8*10k
8*10k
8*10k
PSD0
68nF
5
68nF
9
9
9
226 / 266
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
SICHER
STE-EIN
RLV
R-BF/CF
REL-NT
RES-F5
RES-F4
RES-F3
NTE
RES-F2
RES-F1
NT-EIN
HF-EIN
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
ext. Steuerbus
Signalleitungen
GND
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
9
8
8*4k7
7
6
5
4
1
C2
RN5
PIO-Ausgnge
J25
J24
F-ST
RES-B3
RES-B2
RES-B1
BF/CF
3
2
1
3
2
1
680R
680R
R19
R13
680R
680R
R16
R11
680R
R18
Vdd
+15V
680R
R17
Vdd
+15V
RN2
FuÆschalter 2
9
680R
680R
R15
GND
GND
GND
1
3
Vdd
+15V
8
C17
C19
C20
7
68nF
C16
68nF
C18
5
GND
68nF
7
FING-A3
FING-B3
GND
68nF
GND
68nF
4
68nF
C21
6
3
8*10k
2
9
3
9
7
1
4050
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
1
4050
IC1
11
5
2
IC1
4
14
2
10
6
12
4
15
9
7
5
11
14
3
4050
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
4050
IC13
1
IC13
RN1
RN18
2
10
6
4
12
15
2
2
1
Vdd
+15V
3
R12
4
680R
R14
5
1
5
3
Vcc
+5V
9
J23
5
Vdd
+15V
6
8*10k
RN17
7
FuÆschalter 1
2
8*10k
Nr.
RES-B5
RES-B6
FUFI-B3
FUFI-A3
Datum
FUSS-B2
FUSS-A2
EIN12
EIN11
EIN10
EIN9
EIN8
EIN7
EIN22
nderung
FUSS-A2
FUSS-B2
Name
6
6
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
Name
5
5
RN10
RN11
Datum
7
7
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt 5 von 6
LP bs.: 30128-351
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
8
8
8*10k
8*10k
9
7
11
5
3
14
9
7
11
5
3
14
4050
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
1
IC6
4050
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
4050
IC5
1
IC5
10
6
12
4
2
15
10
6
12
4
2
15
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
9
9
GND
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
A
FUFI-A3
FUFI-B3
FING-B2
FING-A2
FING-B1
FING-A1
FUSS-B1
FUSS-A1
EIN21
FUSS-A1
FUSS-B1
7
Vcc
+5V
5
5
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
8
Vcc
+5V
8*10k
8*10k
RN3
RN4
GND
6
6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
7
GND
9
8
8
1
6
7
5
9
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
EIN16
EIN15
EIN14
EIN13
EIN6
EIN5
EIN23
EIN18
EIN17
EIN4
EIN3
EIN2
EIN1
EIN20
EIN19
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
228 / 266
9
8
4
8*2k2
8
6
1
3
GND
5
GND
Vee
-15V
4
IC12
TL082
8
+
Vdd
+15V
R7
10k
D5
C12
C14
D6
D7
1N4148
1k/1W
68nF
68nF
100k
GND
IC12
TL082
-
5 +
6
IC12
TL082
-
3 +
2
7
1
NE Nessy
J26
I-HFL
3
2
1
3
UE1
Nr.
R25
GND
nderung
4
1
2
5
2
1
6
3
1k2
D10
AE2 Gen.
BA159
C31
Datum
BA159
J29
u022
C30
Name
C28
3
A
C29
3
2
J27
J58
J57
1
3
2
1
3
2
Datum
GND
GND
Name
Vdd
+15V
NE Bu.
AE2 Bu.
AE1 Bu.
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Blatt
6 von 6
LP bs.: 30128-351
LP un.: 40128-092
Gepr ft
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
68R
R24
BA159
BA159
D27
D26
BA159
BA159
D25
u022
u15
1
R22
u15
TP1
D24
C26
C27
GND
68nF
Vee
-15V
3M3
R21
IC14 OFF
LF356
-+
3 +
-
2
Vdd
+15V
5
6
R-BF/CF
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
GND
68nF
2
1
1
10k
220R
REL2
REL2
D11
7
4
J28
2k2
1N4148
D9
1N4148
D22
rot
D23
GND
+24V
30128-351
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Motherboard
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
R23
3k6
R74
1N4148
D12
REL2
R20
/ 266
330k
C25
228
1uF
AE1 Gen.
BF/CF
RES-F5
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10nF
R8
10V
10V
C13
L1
R4
ICC 350
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Motherboard (bare)
40128-092
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
229 / 266
J1
13
4
3
14
D2
D3
D4
D5
0.6
Vcc
+5V
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
D0
A10
A9
Vdd
+15V
0.6
GND
0.8
FING_B2
FING_A2
FING_B1
FING_A1
+24V
STEUERBUS
Vdd
+15V
A8
A7
GND
15
2
5
12
7
10
Vee
-15V
STEUERBUS
40174
+24V
1D
R
C1
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
6
D1
MP1
11
D0
9
R14
4
5
6
7
D2
D3
D4
D5
9
Vdd
+15V
D7
8
3
D1
D6
2
D0
10k
R15
10k
GND
REL1
RN1
3
Vdd
+15V
GND
D15
1
GND
Vdd
+15V
3
1
2
9
12
8
6
4
5
GND
1N4148
2
REL2
RCX
CX
GND
G
2
1
3
4
5
Q
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC5
13
11
10
&
1N4148
Q
OSC OUT
GND
T4
BC547
+24V
D16
REL2
4047
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
IC6
Vdd
+15V
T3
BC547
GND
Vdd
+15V
8x10k
2
4k7
+24V
R25
1
STEUERBUS
REL2
n.best.
IC8
1
R19
68nF
3
1
7
6
5k1
R22
14
15
13
12
11
Vdd
+15V
2
SD101A
2
4k7
D17
R13
D19
R16
&
C14
GND
1
9
10
+
Nr.
nderung
GND
1
3
1
2
6
5
4011
&
4011
IC4
&
IC4
GND
Datum
Name
3
4
10:10:32
2
T6
BC517
3
UE2
1
Vdd
+15V
GND
1
3
B
4011
&
4011
IC4
&
Datum
12
13
9
8
Vdd
+15V
IC4
1N4148
1N4148
11
10
E
Name
T2
T1
GND
D14
11V
D5
14-07-94
M.Hagg
Blatt 1 von 1
LP bs.: 30128-352
LP un.: 40128-093
Gepr ft
D4
6
GND
10
9
11
8
4
5
3
4013
S
C
D
R
IC3
4013
S
C
D
R
IC3
R23
R2
R6
150R
12
13
2
1
GND
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Vdd
+15V
SFH450
IC2
SFH450
IC1
1N4148
1N4148
150R
10nF
R1
56R
R5
56R
GND
10
9
11
8
4
5
3
6
4013
S
C
D
R
IC7
4013
S
C
D
R
IC7
12
13
2
1
30128-352
3
2
1
3
2
1
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
RELAIS-BOARD
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
10nF
11V
5k1
Gezeich. 10-02-94 M.Fritz
Vdd
+15V
C4
C5
10:10:32
2
T2
BC517
3
1
14-7-94 Fritz
R21
1k
2
C8
3u3
+
2
C9
3u3
B 3251 s.Anderungsmit.
4528
RX/ CX
R
CX
IC5
GND
T5
BC517
3
GND
1
T1
BC517
3
GND
R8
R7
R10
2
6n8
T1
T1
SD101A
680R
510R
R9
D18
R17
D20
R18
4k7
SD101A
4k7
0R
D6
0R
D9
UE1
100pF
T2
T2
1nF
1nF
D1
D2
D10
D11
B
680R
510R
C
n.best
n.best
Vdd
+15V
R20
1N4148
1N4148
IC1
SFH350
D7
D8
REL1
C11
SD101A
4k7
+15V
Vdd
J2
+
C
C3
C2
E
D3
D12
D13
B
1N4148
1N4148
IC2
SFH350
C1
C6
R3
R4
10nF
10nF
5k1
n.best
n.best
3
R24
3u3
C10
FING_A1
FING_B1
1
10k
C13
68nF
C12
5
68nF
J4
J3
FING_A2
230 / 266
FING_B2
REL1
ICC 350
Relay Board
30128-352
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
C7
ICC 350
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Relay Board (bare)
40128-093
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
231 / 266
5
J2-5
NULL
J2-5
J2
5
4
3
2
1
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
D12
BA159
BA159
D11
J2-5
NULL
J2-2
J2-1
Vcc
+5V
I-NEURO
CS13
RESET
CS12
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
2
1
I
I
J2-2
G
IC1
78xx
7815
IC2
79xx
7915
G
O
O
3
3
R1
MP3
MP2
MP5
820k
C8
NEG15
POS15
NULL
CLR
NULL
10uF
220R
1k5
R21
10k
R9
68nF
R4
+
B250C800
D2
4
IC3
TL082
8
+
D7
9V1
9V1
D6
+24V
-
NEG15
POS15
2
NEG15
T5
BC557
Nr.
6
NULL
1k
R19
-
R2
7
nderung
R36=3k3
TL082
IC6
5 +
FTEST
1
10k
A5
C9
C10
2
R23
T1
BUX84
1k5
Datum
14.6.93
NULL
10k
3
A4
+
+
2
10k
R13
Name
MF
3 +
1
7
D1
1N4148
+
CT
-
CT
RT
Blatt
1 von 2
Fout
2
2
1
TY1
10k
R14
1
NULL
U-STEUER
I-FREQ
3
R15
F1
MP9
T4
BUX84
REL2
MP4
REL1
REL2
REL1
30128-070
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Neurotest-Board
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
NULL
1
MP1
T2
BUX84
62mA
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
AD654
DGND
U
F
1k
POS15
IC4
5
Vin
Name
6
7
3
4
8
FRES
M.Fritz 14-06-93
Datum
R5
470R
R38
2
8k2
30128-070
LP bs.: 40128-027
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Gezeich.
C
IC3
TL082
-
5 +
6
IC3
TL082
-
R6
R8
A3
100uF
C1
100uF
C2
NEG15
27k
27k
GND
C14
A2
100nF
100nF
R12
1N4148
C13
R3
T3
BUX84
3
1
BR1
0u33
1
X0303
A1
2
1
+
C3
3
1
390R
0u047
2
3
~
~
C12
C11
10k
J2-1
+
+
R24
TP1
220k
D13
MP6
1uF
1uF
10k
10k
2
3
R22
BA159
R7
232 / 266
390R
J1
J4
3
2
1
J5
NE
AE
3
2
1
ICC 350 Neurotest
Neurotest Board
30128-070
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
R39
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
14
3
4
13
6
11
9
IC14
8
+
4
IC6
TL082
40174
R
C1
1D
NULL
68nF
C6
ESD0
68nF
C4
1
68nF
CS12
3
4
5
7
12
5
2
15
NEG15
POS15
2
7
IC13
GND
8
11
10
12
13
14
15
16
rot
D14
D16
REL2
1N4148
D15
REL1
1N4148
9
ULN2004A
+24V
6
1
10
1k5
RESET
R37
I-NEURO
R36
2k2
Vdd
+15V
R35
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R34
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R33
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R32
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R31
MP7
GND
3k3
C7
8
9
GND
IC8
CNY66
CNY66
IC12
CNY66
IC11
CNY66
IC10
CNY66
IC9
Vdd
+15V
1
16
1
16
1
16
1
16
1
16
CNY66
IC7
R29
1
16
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
9
1k3
POS15
I-FREQ
R10
Vdd
+15V
POS15
3k3
R20
Nr.
R30
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
68nF
3k3
R18
8k2
5
NULL
11
12
13
10
3k3
nderung
R36=3k3
NULL
3k3
R16
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
+
-
8
Datum
14.6.93
4028
BCD/DEC 0
1
2
1
3
2
4
4
5
8
6
7
8
9
IC5
16
Name
MF
NULL
5
9
4
7
6
1
15
2
14
3
POS15
Blatt
LP bs.:
LP un.:
2 von 2
30128-070
40128-027
M.Fritz 14-06-93
Gepr ft
Datum
Name
1N4148
1N4148
D4
C
2k4
4k3
R17
1N4148
D10
Gezeich.
FTEST
FRES
CLR
7k5
R28
1N4148
D9
1N4148
D8
30k
R26
13k
R27
D5
R25
IC6
TL082
1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3 +
2
D3
R11
220k
U-STEUER
NEG15
30128-070
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Neurotest-Board
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
1N4148
ICC 350 Neurotest
Neurotest Board
30128-070
233 / 266
C5
ICC 350 Neurotest
Neurotest Board
40128-027
234 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vcc
+5V
CS13
CS12
CS11
RESET
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
-15V
Vee
Vcc
+5V
RES-ANA2
+24V
GND
F-IIST
CS13
RESET
CS12
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
+24V
RES-ANA1
Vdd
+15V
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
4
6
2
3
5
1
J2
GND
RES-F6
RES-F4
RES-F3
RES-F2
LED-FERN
RES-B6
RES-B5
RES-B4
F-INTENS
FING-NEU
F-IIST
FING-B3
FING-A3
-15V
+24V Vee
Vdd
+15V
GND
2u2
+
Vcc
+5V
LED-FERN
F-INTENS
GND
R2
1k
Vdd
+15V
2
C2
C6
A4
GND
1k
2V7
C5
Vdd
+15V
1u5
2
GND
10:10
1
UE1
68nF
C4
1
5
4
3
GND 2
J4
Nr.
nderung
IC1
Name
SFH450
Datum
100R
68nF
R1
C3
Zur Fernbedienungsbuchse
100R
R7
T1
BC517
u15
A3
R3
D1
Vdd
+15V
3
1
A2
GND
B
Datum
GND
4
2
40128-028
LP bs.: 30128-071
Blatt 1 von 1
LP un.:
Gepr ft
Name
4050
1
4050
IC2
1
IC2
15.10.92
5
3
IC1
SFH350
Vdd
+15V
Gezeich. M.Fritz
B
1m8
L1
C1
A1
C
E
u47
R5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
22k
5
J3
Vdd
+15V
3
2
1
R4
1k
rot
D3
GND
FING-NEU
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
D2
1N4148
10k
R6
J1
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
14
4050
1
4050
IC2
1
4050
IC2
1
4050
IC2
1
IC2
15
12
10
6
30128-071
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Neurotest-Motherboard
ZMK
Benennung/Title
ICC
Gert/UNIT
GND
11
9
7
ICC 350 Neurotest
Motherboard Neurotest
30128-071
235 / 266
ICC 350 Neurotest
Motherboard Neurotest (bare)
40128-028
236 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RESET
CS12
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
CS11
RESET
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
CS12
RESET
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
10
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
22k
1
15
14
CS11
Vdd
+15V
2
3
RN1
12
2
5
13
40174
10
4
1D
11
6
9
7
7
6
R
C1
12
13
1
5
40174
IC5
15
2
4
1D
R
C1
IC6
RES-ANA2
RES-ANA1
TRANS_1
CS11
RESET
CS12
ESD7
ESD6
ESD5
ESD4
ESD3
ESD2
ESD1
ESD0
14
3
9
1
Vcc
+5V
2
2
1
3
R31
J2
22k
9
Vdd
+15V
TRANS_1
A2
A1
OSZI_ON
GND
+24V
10
12
13
14
15
16
7
3
11
8
ULN2004A
2
6
5
4
3
2
IC4
3
1
1
REL1
REL1
J3
REL2
REL2
1
REL7
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
J13
+24V
2k
2
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
-
IC3
TL084
+
J9
J11
J10
J8
REL4
REL4
REL2
REL3
REL3
2
J6
REL1
68nF
1
1
D1
3
rot
J5
R2
4
3
2k
rot
+24V
D2
A5
R1
C8
A4
2k
rot
A3
8
+
4
IC1
TL082
R3
D3
REL5
REL5
REL3
68nF
REL6
REL6
REL4
J12
2k
rot
P6KE18CA
P6KE18CA
1
1
Nr.
C 3107
A1
15:15
2
15:15
UE1
2
UE2
D 4015
REL5
GND
R4
D4
D11
D10
2k
rot
C15
2
1uF
C14
1uF
R21
GND
T3
BS170
nderung
R17=2k4
D10,D11 neu
1
3
Vdd
+15V
10k
R22
Vdd
+15V
A2
Datum
30.4.94
10.12.96
T1
BS170
Name
Fritz
Fritz
GND
1
2
22k
Vdd
+15V
3
GND
5k
GND
2k4
R9
GND
C5
GND
R16
Datum
-+
Name
Blatt
1 von 1
2k4
GND
7
REL7
REL7
R29
2k
R15
GND
6
GND
2k4
R30
100R
R26
RES-ANA1
5k
4k7
R34
1N4148
D9
GND
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
+24V
M.Fritz
C10
68nF
IC3
TL084
-
5 +
6
Vee
-15V
GND
C7
68nF
7
IC2 B/C1 C2
LM318 B/C3
3 +
-
2
Vdd
+15V
40128-064
LP bs.: 30128-200
LP un.:
Gepr ft
R33
2k7
GND
-
5k6
GND
GND
22nF
OSZI_ON
8
C1
R32
1nF
GND
6
TL082
IC1
5 +
R25
Gezeich. 28-05-93
D
T2
BS170
R18
1
3
GND
IC3
TL084
-
OSZ_OUT
10 +
9
2
2k4
2k4
R11
U_KENN
TP1
R7
C2
A2
R5
D5
15k
12k
A1
REL6
J1
2k
rot
NE
R6
D6
J4
R20
D7
C9
2k
gelb
R19
C6
10k
10k
22nF
R12
C3
R23
220pF
10k
1
4k7
1nF
R17
C4
C12
8
4k7
R10
2k4
1nF
1nF
R28
4k7
R24
2k4
7
4
68nF
AE
C13
5
MASSE
BA159
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
11
D8
TP2
R8
R27
5
5
4
3
2
1
2k4
-
30128-200
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
MIC-Board
OSZ_OUT
GND
1.0
Vee
-15V
0.7
0.7
MP2
U_KENN
RES-ANA2
MP1
Vdd
+15V
390R
R13
1
1
Ventil
14
Benennung/Title
ICC
R35
2k7
TL084
IC3
R14
2
Gert/UNIT
J7
-
TL082
IC1
3 +
2
3 +
IC3
TL084
-
22nF
GND
GND
4k7
12 +
13
GND
GND
20k
C11
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
MIC Board
30128-200
237 / 266
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
MIC Board (bare)
40128-064
238 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Nr.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
nderung
J10
1
2
Datum
250mA
F10
Name
01-12-97
01-12-97
Gepr ft
Name
E.Werner
E.Werner
Blatt 1 von 1
LP un.:
40128-141
LP bs.: 30128-661
Datum
Gezeich.
NS2004
NS2004
A
1N5373
D101
D105
Bruecke
D104
Bruecke
C100
D106
NS2004
D107
3
2
1
J11
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
D103
NS2004
D109
0.01uF
D108
1N5383
D102
5
1N5383
3
30128-661
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
Protection-Board
Benennung/Title
ICC 350 MMH Doku
Gert/UNIT
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
Protection Board
30128-661
239 / 266
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
Protection Board (bare)
40128-141
240 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Appendix
A
Part Numbers
ICC 200 (D)
10128-002/-010/-023
50502-059
30128-060
30121-025
40128-103
30121-023
30128-065
30121-195
30128-056
51501-167
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
51501-167
30121-086
30128-063
A
APPENDIX A
51601-056
50610-009
51611-051
(Fuses)
51031-043 (Pot.)
51501-190 (button)
-191
-192
51603-000
(cpl.)
243 / 266
ICC 200 (UL)
10128-202/-204/-205
30128-458
50502-069
30128-725
30128-727
30128-728
(cpl.)
30128-065 30128-056
51501-167
30128-691
(pin)
51501-167
40128-103
30121-086
30128-063
244
/ 266
51601-056
50610-009
51611-100 (Fuses)
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000 (cpl.)
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 200 (INT)
10128-009/-015/-036
30128-458
30128-725
50502-059
30128-691
(pin)
51501-167
30128-727
30128-065
30128-728
30128-056
51501-167
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
40128-103
30121-086
30128-063
A
APPENDIX A
51601-056
50610-009
51611-051 (Fuses)
51031-043 (Pot.)
51501-190 (Button, cpl.)
-191
-192
51603-000
245 / 266
ICC 200 (F)
10128-051/-054/-056
30128-116
50502-059
51501-167
30121-025
40128-112
30121-023
30128-065
30128-056
51601-056
30128-063
246
/ 266
30121-086
50610-009
30121-195
51501-167
51611-051
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 200
Boards
40128-103
40128-112 (F)
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Ers. durch = Repl. by
A
APPENDIX A
247 / 266
ICC 300 (D)
10128-070, -071
51501-167
40128-133
30128-313
50502-059
30121-086
30121-025
30128-022
30127-011
248
/ 266
30121-390
30128-021
30121-023
30121-023
51501-167
30121-195
51031-043 (Pot.)
51603-000
51501-190
51601-025
51611-051
-191
(Fuse)
-192
50610-009
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 300 (UL)
10128-213, -214
51501-167
30128-419
30128-691
(Pin)
40128-133
30128-021
30121-390
30128-726
51501-167
30128-728
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
50502-069
30128-725
30121-086
30128-022
30127-011
A
APPENDIX A
50610-009
51031-043
51501-190
51601-025
-191
-192
51611-100
(Fuses)
51603-000
249 / 266
ICC 300 (INT)
10128-077, -078
51501-167
30128-419
50502-059
30121-086
30128-725
30128-691
30128-022
30127-011
250
/ 266
40128-133
30121-390
30128-021
30128-726
51501-167
30128-728
50610-009
51603-000
51031-043
51501-190
51601-025
51611-051
-191
(Fuse)
-192
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 300 (F)
10128-072, -073
51501-167
30128-315
30121-025
30128-021
30121-023
30121-390
30121-023
51501-167
30121-195
0Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
50502-059
40128-134
30121-086
30128-022
30127-011
A
APPENDIX A
50610-009
51031-043
51501-190
51601-025
-191
-192
51603-000
51611-051
251 / 266
ICC 300
Boards
40128-133 (D/INT)
40128-134 (F)
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Ers. durch = Repl. by
252
/ 266
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 (D)
10128-016 (Endo)
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-016
51501-167
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
30127-011
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
253 / 266
ICC 350 (UL)
10128-200, -206 (Endo)
30128-725
50502-069
30128-441
40128-101
30128-726
30128-021
30128-728
30121-390
30128-691
51501-167
30121-086
254
/ 266
30127-011
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-100
(Fuses)
A
51603-000
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 (INT)
10128-061 (Endo)
30128-725
50502-059
30128-726
40128-101
30128-021
30128-441
30128-728
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-691
51501-167
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
30127-011
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
255 / 266
ICC 350 (F)
10128-055 (Endo), -082 (MIC)
50502-059
30121-025
30128-080
30128-679 (MIC)
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
30121-195
40128-110
30121-390
30128-668
30121-431
51708-043
51501-167
30127-011
50610-009
30121-086
51604-035
256
/ 266
30128-022
30128-680 (MIC)
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
(Fuses)
51501-167
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 M-Doku
10128-081
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
30121-023
40128-101
30128-021
30121-390
30128-668
30121-195
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-533
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
30127-011
51601-025
50610-009
50600-021
51031-043
30128-671
51501-190
51501-191/-192
51603-000
51611-051
51501-167
257 / 266
ICC 350 Z
10128 -065
50502-059
30121-025
30128-083
30128-085
30121-086
51501-167
258
/ 266
30121-023
30128-021
30127-011
51604-035
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-431
30121-390
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 T
10128-066
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-089
51501-167
A
30128-085
30127-011
30121-086
APPENDIX A
51604-035
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
259 / 266
ICC 350 M (INT)
10128-083, -310
30128-725
50502-059
30128-606
30128-726
40128-101 30121-390
30128-021
30128-668
30128-728
30128-691
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
260
/ 266
30127-011
51601-025
50610-009
51031-043
30128-204
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000
51611-051
A
51501-167
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 M
10128-080
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
40128-101
30121-390
30128-668
30121-195
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-533
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
30127-011
51601-025
50610-009
51031-043
30128-671
51501-190
51501-191/-192
51603-000
51611-051
51501-167
261 / 266
ICC 350
Boards
40128-101
40128-110 (F)
Gezeich. = Drawn
Geprüft = Checked
Freigabe = Approv.
Datum = Date*
Name = Name
Maßstab = Scale
Datei = File
Projekt = Project
Benennung = Title
Nummer = Number
Ers. für = Replaces
Ers. durch = Repl. by
262
/ 266
A
APPENDIX A
Appendix
B
Abbreviations, Notes,
Addresses
264 / 266
B
APPENDIX B
Appendix
Abbreviations
Notes
Addresses
Abbreviations
The following list summarizes all those abbreviations and symbols which are used in this service manual.
Abbreviation means
NE neutral electrode
Abbreviation means
ö phase angle
| non-split NE
V(p) volts (peak value)
|| split NE
A(eff) amperes (r.m.s. value)
Parts lists
This service manual includes no parts lists. However, if you should need to refer to part numbers, please see
Appendix A.
Measuring equipment
For a list of recommended measuring equipment for servicing the units ICC 200, ICC 300 and ICC 350,
please refer to this service manual (Chapter 1, Test program 16).
Diagrams of electrical dimensions
The diagrams of the electrical dimensions are not shown in this service manual. However, you will find
these printed in the instruction manuals for the respective unit.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Any questions?
This service manual has been put together carefully and was subjected to a continuous improvement process
during its creation by the Service Department and/or the Development Department at ERBE Elektromedizin.
Nevertheless, you may still have questions; additionally, this manual cannot assume to be perfect and
completely without error. In such cases, please contact:
Contents, formulation, structure, technical
information
Technical questions regarding service and the
units
Dipl.-Phys. Michael Grosse (Development Dept.)
Service Manager Roland Bauer (Service Dept.)
Tel.: (+49) 70 71 / 755–254
Tel.: (+49) 70 71 / 755–454
E-mail: [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected]
B
APPENDIX B
265/ 266
Your notes
Descargar